Quantum INDi XL Series Service Manual

CPI Canada Inc.
PRE-INSTALLATION 1¾
SERVICE INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION 2¾

AND
INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING 3¾
MANUAL
P.N. #740855 ACCEPTANCE TEST 4¾
TROUBLESHOOTING 5¾
REGULAR MAINTENANCE 6¾
THEORY OF OPERATION 7¾
SPARES 8¾
SCHEMATICS 9¾
The original version of this manual (Aug.21,1997)

has been drafted in the English language by:
Communications & Power Industries
communications & medical products division.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-00 Rev. A Page 0-1

CPI Canada Inc.
(This page intentionally left blank)
Page 0-2 Rev. A Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-00

CPI Canada Inc Pre-installation 1
CHAPTER 1
PRE-INSTALLATION
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose
This manual applies to the Indico 100 family of generators and provides instructions for the installation and
maintenance of all models of that generator.
This Chapter contains the following sections.
SECTION TITLE
1A Introduction
1B Safety
1C Preparing for installation
1D Compatibility listing
1E Generator layout and Major Components

1 Pre-installation CPI Canada Inc
(This page intentionally left blank.)

CPI Canada Inc. Introduction 1A
CHAPTER 1 SECTION 1A
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS:
Section Title
1A.1.0 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................... 1A-1
1A.1.1 Purpose.................................................................................................................................................. 1A-1
1A.2.0 GENERATOR DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................. 1A-1
1A.3.0 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................................................. 1A-2
1A.4.0 APPLICATIONS ........................................................................................................................................ 1A-4
1A.5.0 FEATURES ............................................................................................................................................... 1A-4
1A.6.0 ROTOR CONTROL ................................................................................................................................... 1A-5
1A.7.0 AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUTS............................................................................................................... 1A-5
1A.8.0 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION ................................................................................................................... 1A-5
1A.9.0 REGULATORIES AND DESIGN STANDARDS........................................................................................ 1A-6
1A.9.1 Environmental Specifications ................................................................................................................. 1A-6
1A.9.2 Applicable Standards ............................................................................................................................. 1A-6
1A.9.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) .................................................................................................... 1A-7
1A.10.0 TECHNIQUE FACTORS DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................ 1A-7
1A.1.0 INTRODUCTION
1A.1.1 Purpose
This manual describes the Millenia and Indico 100 family of 350, 650, 850, and 1050 X-ray generators. The
manual provides instructions for the installation and service of these generators.
1A.2.0 GENERATOR DESCRIPTION
Depending on configuration and options, the generator provides the power and interfacing to operate X-ray
tubes, buckys, rad tables, GI (gastro-intestinal) tables, remote R&F tables, tomographic devices, and digital
imaging systems. The generator consists of power supply and control systems housed in the upper and
lower cabinets, a control console, and an optional remote fluoro control along with the necessary
interconnecting cable(s).
Major items provided are:
• X-ray generator housed in upper and lower cabinets

• Control console
• Optional remote fluoro control
• Interconnecting cable(s)
• Operator's manual
• Service and installation manual.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-00 Rev. E Page 1A-1
1A Introduction CPI Canada Inc.
1A.3.0 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Figure 1A-1 shows the outline of the Millenia series X-ray generator, control console, and remote fluoro
control. Figure 1A-2 shows the Indico 100 series X-ray generator outline.
Figure 1A-1: Generator outline drawing (Millenia)
Page 1A-2 Rev. E Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-00
1A.3.0 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONT)
Figure 1A-2 shows the outline of the Indico 100 series X-ray generator.
2 2 (5 5 9 )
1 8 .2 (46 3 )
TO P
A N C H O R IN G P L AT E S
4 PLAC ES
1 8 (4 5 7 ) 1 6 (4 0 6 )
11 .8 (3 0 0 )
48 .7 (1 23 7 )
3 6.8 (9 3 5)
3 6 (9 1 5 )
2 1 .8 (5 5 4 )
FRONT R IG H T S ID E REAR
1 6 .6 (4 2 2 )
3 .7 (9 4 )
F IG U RE 1 A -1 S H O W S T H E O U T LINE
12 .3 (3 13 )
F O R TH E 2 3 X 5 6 (C M ) C O N S O LE .
T H IS FIG U R E S H O W S T H E O U T LIN E
F O R TH E 3 1 X 4 2 (C M ) C O N S O LE .
CO NSO LE
A L L D IM E N S IO N S A R E IN IN C H E S (M M )
Figure 1A-2: Generator outline drawing (Indico 100)
1A.4.0 APPLICATIONS
RAD SYSTEMS:
• Bucky table, table top and off-table radiography
• Vertical bucky/cassette radiography
• Conventional tomography
R&F SYSTEMS
• Fluoroscopic and spot film applications
• Tomography with conventional and/or remote R&F tables
• Optional digital compatible.
1A.5.0 FEATURES
• High frequency generator.

• One or two tube operation, Rad or Rad / Fluoro.
• Single or dual filament supplies.
• Low speed or dual speed X-ray tube stator supply.
• Optimal matching of X-ray tubes by PROMs.
• Repetitive self checks of generator functions, provides display of system faults and operating errors.
• Optional AEC, up to four inputs.
• Optional ABS with kVp or kVp/mA fluoro stabilizer.
• Optional remote fluoro control box for table top use or SFD mounting.
• X-ray Tube protection. The generator allows setting the following limits:
a) Maximum mA, adjustable for each focal spot.
b) Maximum kVp, adjustable for each X-ray tube.
c) Maximum kW, adjustable for each focal spot.
d) Maximum filament current limit, adjustable for large and small focal spots.
e) Anode heat warning and anode heat alarm levels.
• Calibration features :
a) Microprocessor design allows all calibration and programming to be performed via the Console.
b) mA calibration is automated.
• Messages and diagnostic information: For users and service personnel, the generator console
displays various messages indicating status or equipment problems. The user is prompted in case of
errors.
• Error log stores last 200 errors and associated generator settings.
• Service and diagnostic information available via a lap-top computer (optional).
• KVp range: Radiography 40 to 150 kVp.
Fluoroscopy 40 to 125 kVp.
• mA range: Radiography 10 to 320 mA (30 kW), 10 to 400 mA (37.5 kW), 10 to 630 mA (50
kW), 10 TO 800 mA (65 kW) and 10 to 1000 mA (80 kW).
Fluoroscopy 0.5 to 6.0 mA.
• mAs range: tube dependent, max 1000 mAs.
• Time range: Radiography 2.0 to 6300 ms.
Fluoroscopy 0 to 5 or 0 to 10 minutes.
Refer to product description (end of section 1D) for compatibility and features of this specific generator.
1A.6.0 ROTOR CONTROL
The generator will be equipped with a low speed starter, or optional dual speed starter.
DUAL SPEED STARTER

Number of tubes permissible: Maximum of 32 tube types. Tube type is switch selectable
Current monitoring Both stator circuits
Dual speed starter output 50 or 60 Hz (low speed)
frequency 150 or 180 Hz (high speed).
(Independent of line frequency)
Braking Dynamic braking when in high speed rotation
Rotor boost time Determined by tube selection plus incremental boost time changes
from 100 to 700 msec.
Duty cycle Not to exceed 2 high speed starts per minute.
LOW SPEED STARTER

Current monitoring Both stator circuits
Duty cycle Not to exceed 5 consecutive boosts, followed by a minimum 10
second wait period.
1A.7.0 AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUTS
The generator supplies the following power outputs for X-ray room equipment:
• 24 VDC, 4 Amp.
• 120 VAC, 2.5 Amp.
• 240 VAC, 1.5 Amp.
2.5 AMPS IS AVAILABLE AT 120 VAC OR 1.5 AMPS IS AVAILABLE AT 240 VAC, BUT BOTH ARE NOT
AVAILABLE SIMULTANEOUSLY.
The above voltage sources are not compatible with:
• Collimator lamps (24 VDC 150 watts). These lamps exceed the 4 Amp rating of the 24 VDC supply.
• Fluorescent lamps. These have high starting currents and generate transients when the tube strikes.
• Some inductive loads may cause difficulties (some motors and solenoids).
1A.8.0 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION
The Millenia and Indico 100 series of X-ray generators includes the following documentation:
• Operator’s manual.
• Service and installation manual.
• Insert and application notes as required.
1A.9.0 REGULATORIES AND DESIGN STANDARDS
1A.9.1 Environmental Specifications
OPERATING
Ambient temperature range 10 to 40 °C
Relative humidity 30 to 75%
Atmospheric pressure range 500 to 1060 hPa (375 to 795 mm Hg)
TRANSPORT AND STORAGE

Ambient temperature range -20 to 70 °C
Relative humidity 10 to 95%, including condensation
Atmospheric pressure range 500 to 1060 hPa (375 to 795 mm Hg)
1A.9.2 Applicable Standards
The Millenia / Indico 100 family of generators complies with the following regulatory requirements and design
standards:
• FDA Center for Devices & Radiological Health (CDRH) - 21 CFR title 21 subchapter J (USA).
• Radiation Emitting Devices Act - C34 (Canada).
• Medical Device Regulations (Canada).
• EC Directive 93/42/EEC concerning Medical Devices (European Community).
• IEC 601.1, IEC 601.2.7:1998, CSA 601.1, UL2601.1
-Type of protection against electric shock: Class I equipment.
-Degree of protection against electric shock: Not classified.
-Degree of protection against harmful ingress of water: Ordinary equipment.
-Mode of operation: Continuous operation with intermittent loading (standby - exposure).
-Equipment not suitable for use in presence of a FLAMMABLE ANESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH
AIR OR WITH OXYGEN OR NITROUS OXIDE.
• IEC 601.1.2
Immunity:
IEC1000-4-2 Electrostatic discharge
IEC1000-4-3 Radiated RF field
IEC1000-4-4 Electrical fast transient
IEC1000-4-5 Surge
IEC1000-4-6 Conducted RF immunity
IEC1000-4-8 Magnetic field immunity
IEC1000-4-11 Voltage dips, interrupts and variations
Emission:
EN55011 (CISPR Publications II Emission Standards, Group 1 Class A).
1A.9.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

In accordance with the intended use, this X-ray generator complies with the European Council Directive
concerning Medical Devices. The CE marking affixed to this product signifies this. One of the harmonized
standards of this Directive defines the permitted levels of electromagnetic emission from this equipment
and its required immunity from the electromagnetic emissions of other devices.
It is not possible, however, to exclude with absolute certainty the possibility that other high frequency
electronic equipment, which is fully compliant to the EMC regulations, will not adversely affect the
operation of this generator. If the other equipment has a comparatively high level of transmission power
and is in close proximity to the generator, these EMC concerns (the risk of interference) may be more
pronounced. It is therefore recommended that the operation of equipment of this type such as mobile
telephones, cordless microphones and other similar mobile radio equipment be restricted from the vicinity
of this X-ray generator.
1A.10.0 TECHNIQUE FACTORS DEFINITIONS
• KV: KV peak after any initial kV overshoot.

• TIME: Time in milliseconds, (ms) that the high voltage (anode to cathode) is greater or equal
to 75% of the desired kV.
• mA: Average Tube Beam Current (in mA) during the exposure TIME.
• mAs: milliampere-seconds (mA x TIME).
Address any questions regarding X-ray generator operation to:
Mail: Customer Support Department

Communications and Power Industries Canada Inc.
45 River Drive
Georgetown, Ontario, Canada L7G 2J4
Telephone: (905) 877-0161
Fax: (905) 877-8320

Attention: Customer Support Department
E-mail: [email protected]
Attention: Customer Support Department
CPI Canada Inc. Safety 1B
CHAPTER 1 SECTION 1B
SAFETY
CONTENTS:
Section Title
1B.1.0 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................................... 1B-1
1B.2.0 SAFETY AND WARNING SYMBOLS ..................................................................................................... 1B-2
1B.3.0 SAFETY NOTICES AND WARNINGS .................................................................................................... 1B-2
1B.4.0 SAFETY WARNING LABELS - INTRODUCTION................................................................................... 1B-4
1B.4.1 Safety Warning Labels - Organization.................................................................................................. 1B-4
1B.5.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES COMMON TO MILLENIA AND INDICO 100........................................... 1B-5
1B.5.1 Caution HV Behind Cover Label .......................................................................................................... 1B-5
1B.5.2 Weight Label ........................................................................................................................................ 1B-6
1B.5.3 DC Bus Label ....................................................................................................................................... 1B-6
1B.5.4 Console CPU Board / Console Board .................................................................................................. 1B-7
1B.5.5 Generator Interface Board.................................................................................................................... 1B-7
1B.5.6 Room Interface Board .......................................................................................................................... 1B-7
1B.5.7 AEC Board ........................................................................................................................................... 1B-7
1B.5.8 Power Input Board................................................................................................................................ 1B-7
1B.5.9 Dual Speed Starter Board .................................................................................................................... 1B-8
1B.6.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES UNIQUE TO MILLENIA ........................................................................... 1B-8
1B.6.1 HT Tank - Transformer Terminals Label .............................................................................................. 1B-8
1B.6.2 Live Mains / Fuses / Ground Label....................................................................................................... 1B-9
1B.6.3 Live Mains / Fuses Label...................................................................................................................... 1B-9
1B.6.4 Caution - Hazardous Voltages Label .................................................................................................. 1B-10
1B.6.5 Warning / Caution / Caution Label ..................................................................................................... 1B-11
1B.6.6 Tank Vent Label ................................................................................................................................. 1B-11
1B.6.7 mA Test Jacks Label.......................................................................................................................... 1B-12
1B.6.8 mA test Jacks ..................................................................................................................................... 1B-12
1B.6.9 F3 (Auxiliary Power Fuseblock) ......................................................................................................... 1B-12
1B.7.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES UNIQUE TO INDICO 100...................................................................... 1B-12
1B.7.1 Caution HV Exposed Label ................................................................................................................ 1B-12
1B.7.2 Caution HV Label ............................................................................................................................... 1B-13
1B.7.3 Danger HV Label................................................................................................................................ 1B-13
1B.7.4 High Voltage Warning Label............................................................................................................... 1B-13
1B.7.5 HT Tank - Transformer Terminals...................................................................................................... 1B-14
1B.7.6 Danger High Tension ......................................................................................................................... 1B-14
1B.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This section contains important safety warnings and safety information required for installing and servicing
the generator.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-01 Rev. D Page 1B-1
1B Safety CPI Canada Inc.
1B.2.0 SAFETY AND WARNING SYMBOLS
The following advisory symbols are used on the safety warning labels, and/or on circuit boards, and/or on
the operator console and the optional remote fluoro control.
High voltage symbol used to indicate the presence

of high voltage.
Warning symbol used to indicate a potential hazard

to operators, service personnel or to the equipment.
It indicates a requirement to refer to the
accompanying documentation for details.
Radiation exposure symbol used on operator

console. Lights to indicate that an exposure is in
progress. This is accompanied by an audible tone
from the console.
Fluoro radiation exposure symbol used on operator

console and on optional remote fluoro control unit.
Lights to indicate that a fluoro exposure is in
progress. This is accompanied by an audible tone
from the console.
WARNING THIS X-RAY UNIT MAY BE Radiation warning label on console, used in certain
DANGEROUS TO PATIENT AND jurisdictions.
OPERATOR UNLESS SAFE
EXPOSURE FACTORS AND Never allow unqualified personnel to operate the X-
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ray generator.
ARE OBSERVED.
1B.3.0 SAFETY NOTICES AND WARNINGS
WARNING: PROPER USE AND SAFE OPERATING PRACTICES WITH RESPECT TO X-RAY
GENERATORS ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF USERS OF SUCH GENERATORS. CPI
CANADA INC. PROVIDES INFORMATION ON ITS PRODUCTS AND ASSOCIATED
HAZARDS, BUT ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITIES FOR AFTER-SALE OPERATING AND
SAFETY PRACTICES.
THE MANUFACTURER ACCEPTS NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY GENERATOR NOT

MAINTAINED OR SERVICED ACCORDING TO THIS SERVICE AND INSTALLATION
MANUAL, OR FOR ANY GENERATOR THAT HAS BEEN MODIFIED IN ANY WAY.
THE MANUFACTURER ALSO ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR X-RAY RADIATION

OVEREXPOSURE OF PATIENTS OR PERSONNEL RESULTING FROM POOR OPERATING
TECHNIQUES OR PROCEDURES.
Page 1B-2 Rev. D Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-01
SAFETY NOTICES AND WARNINGS (cont)
WARNING: THIS X-RAY UNIT MAY BE DANGEROUS TO PATIENT AND OPERATOR UNLESS SAFE
EXPOSURE FACTORS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ARE OBSERVED.
X-ray radiation exposure may be damaging to health, with some effects being cumulative and extending
over periods of many months or even years. Operators and service personnel should avoid any
exposure to the primary beam and take protective measures to safeguard against scatter radiation.
Scatter radiation is caused by any object in the path of the primary beam and may be of equal or less
intensity than the primary beam that exposes the film.
No practical design can incorporate complete protection for operators or service personnel who do not
take adequate safety precautions. Only authorized and properly trained service and operating
personnel should be allowed to work with this X-ray generator equipment. The appropriate
personnel must be made aware of the inherent dangers associated with the servicing of high voltage
equipment and the danger of excessive exposure to X-ray radiation during system operation.
Do not connect unapproved equipment to the rear of the console. For the 23 X 56 (cm)
console, J5 is used for the interconnect cable to the generator main cabinet, J4 is not used, J2
is a serial port for use by an external computer, and J1 is for connection of an optional printer.
For the 31 X 42 (cm) console, J5 is used for the interconnect cable to the generator main
cabinet, J2 is a serial port for use by an external computer, and J13 is for connection of an
external hand switch and / or foot switch. INCORRECT CONNECTIONS OR USE OF
UNAPPROVED EQUIPMENT MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED THE TUBE MAXIMUM OPERATING LIMITS. INTENDED LIFE AND
RELIABILITY WILL NOT BE OBTAINED UNLESS GENERATORS ARE OPERATED WITHIN
PUBLISHED SPECIFICATIONS.
WARNING: HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES EXIST INSIDE THE GENERATOR WHENEVER THE MAIN POWER
DISCONNECT IS SWITCHED ON. THOSE AREAS INCLUDE THE MAIN FUSEHOLDER AND
ASSOCIATED CIRCUITS IN THE HV POWER SUPPLY, PORTIONS OF THE GENERATOR
INTERFACE BOARD ON THE UPPER DOOR OF THE GENERATOR, AND THE TERMINALS
ON THE LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER IN THE LOWER GENERATOR CABINET IF
FITTED
THE CONSOLE ON/OFF SWITCH DOES NOT DISCONNECT THE MAIN POWER FROM THE
ABOVE AREAS INSIDE THE GENERATOR.
THE BUS CAPACITORS, LOCATED ON THE BASE OF THE POWER SUPPLY PRESENT A
SAFETY HAZARD FOR AT LEAST 5 MINUTES AFTER THE POWER HAS BEEN REMOVED
FROM THE UNIT. CHECK THAT THESE CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED BEFORE
SERVICING THE GENERATOR.
1B.4.0 SAFETY WARNING LABELS - INTRODUCTION
The safety warning label subsections define the safety labels used inside and outside the generator
cabinets. Depending on configuration, your X-ray generator may contain some or all of the labels shown.
NOTE: THESE LABELS AND WARNINGS ARE LOCATED TO ALERT SERVICE PERSONNEL THAT
SERIOUS INJURY WILL RESULT IF THE HAZARD IDENTIFIED IS IGNORED.
NOTE: DUE TO THE DIVERSITY OF GENERATOR MODELS, THE EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE
EXACTLY AS SHOWN.
WARNING: SWITCH OFF THE MAIN POWER DISCONNECT AND ALLOW SUFFICIENT TIME FOR ALL
CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE BEFORE REMOVING ANY COVERS OR OPENING ANY
SERVICE DOOR.
WARNING: IF ANY BARRIERS OR COVERS MUST BE REMOVED FOR SERVICE, TAKE ALL REQUIRED
PRECAUTIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE HAZARD(S) AND IMMEDIATELY REPLACE THE
BARRIERS/COVERS WHEN THE NEED FOR REMOVAL IS COMPLETED.
REPLACE ALL FUSES IN THIS GENERATOR WITH THE SAME TYPE AND
RATING.
This information is provided to help you establish safe operating conditions for both you and your CPI X-
ray generator. Do not operate this X-ray generator except in accordance with these precautions, and any
additional information provided by the X-ray generator manufacturer and/or competent safety authorities.
1B.4.1 Safety Warning Labels - Organization
The safety warning label information is organized into three subsections:
• Safety labels/notices common to Millenia and Indico 100

• Safety notices unique to Millenia
• Safety notices unique to Indico 100
1B.5.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES COMMON TO MILLENIA AND INDICO 100
1B.5.1 Caution HV Behind Cover Label
MILLENIA: This label is attached to a cover over the main power contactor. This area will have mains
voltage applied as long as the main disconnect is switched on.
MILLENIA: This label is attached to a cover over the resonant circuit and low speed starter
components if a low speed starter is fitted. The resonant components (resonant
capacitors etc) may be energized for 5 minutes after the console is switched off, or the
main disconnect is switched off.
If a low speed starter is fitted, the associated components will have up to 240
VAC applied when the console is switched on.
MILLENIA: This label is attached to each of the access panels on the rear of the generator. The high
voltage hazards behind these panels is similar to that behind the upper and lower
entrance doors, see 1B.7.4.
MILLENIA: This label is attached to a cover over the line adjusting transformer (if fitted). The
terminals on the transformer will have mains voltage applied as long as the main
disconnect is switched on. If access to the transformer connections is needed, SWITCH
OFF THE MAIN DISCONNECT FIRST.
INDICO 100: This label is attached to a cover over the inverter board(s). The inverter assembly is
connected to the main DC bus and will have high voltage applied at all times that the
generator is switched on. This assembly will remain energized for 5 minutes after the
generator is switched off, or the main disconnect is switched off.
INDICO 100: This label is attached to a cover over the main input fuses on the power input board. This
area will have mains voltage applied as long as the main disconnect is switched on.
1B.5.2 Weight Label
MILLENIA: This label is attached to the upper and lower generator cabinets and to the HT oil tank
and states the approximate weight of each of the generator sections and of the HT oil
tank. This label cautions against attempting to lift those assemblies without proper
assistance.
INDICO 100: This label is attached to the lower generator cabinet and to the HT oil tank and states the
approximate weight of the lower generator cabinet and of the HT oil tank. This label
cautions against attempting to lift those assemblies without proper assistance.
1B.5.3 DC Bus Label
MILLENIA: This label is attached to a cover over the DC bus capacitors. These capacitors will hold a
lethal charge for 5 minutes after the console is switched off, or the main disconnect is
switched off. Do not remove the cover for a minimum of 5 minutes after the power has
been switched off.
INDICO 100: This label is attached to the removable panels on the lower (power supply) cabinet. The
internal capacitors will hold a lethal charge for 5 minutes after the console is switched off,
or the main disconnect is switched off. Do not remove the cover for a minimum of 5
minutes after the power has been switched off.
WARNING: WAIT A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES AFTER THE INPUT MAINS POWER HAS BEEN REMOVED
BEFORE REMOVING ANY COVERS OR ACCESS PANELS. ONCE THE COVER(S) /
PANEL(S) ARE REMOVED CHECK THAT THE VOLTAGE ACROSS THE DC BUS
CAPACITORS IS LESS THAN 48 VDC BEFORE SERVICING.
1B.5.4 Console CPU Board / Console Board
For 23 X 56 (cm) consoles: This symbol is printed on the console CPU board near U32.
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Approximately 400 VAC is present on this board in the area of U32
and J10. This voltage is used to light the backlight for the LCD display assembly in the
console.
For 31 X 42 (cm) consoles: This symbol is printed on the console board near U40.
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD IF U40 IS FITTED: U40 is a high voltage source for the fluorescent
backlight on the LCD display. Approximately 400 VAC is present on this board in the area of
U40 and J10 if U40 is fitted. On LED backlight versions of the LCD display, high voltage
source U40 is not fitted and no high voltage is present in this area.
1B.5.5 Generator Interface Board
This symbol is printed on the generator interface board in the high volage (mains) area.
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Components within the dashed line on the board have high
voltage applied at all times that the main disconnect is switched ON. These components are
live EVEN WITH THE CONSOLE SWITCHED OFF.
This symbol is printed on the generator interface board near fuses F1 to F6.
FUSE RATINGS:
F1: 1.6A 250V slow blow
F2, F5: 2.5A 250V slow blow
F3, F4: 5A 250V slow blow
F6: 2A 250 V slow blow
1B.5.6 Room Interface Board
This symbol is printed on the room interface board near the 110/220 VAC terminal blocks.
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: 110/220 VAC may be present on this board at all times that the AC
mains to the generator is switched on.
1B.5.7 AEC Board
This symbol is printed on some versions of AEC board with a high voltage power supply for a
PMT or ion chamber.
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Depending on the AEC board type, up to approximately 1000 VDC
may be present on the AEC board at all times that the generator is switched on.
1B.5.8 Power Input Board
Power input boards for single phase 240 VAC generators are fitted with several high power
resistors that operate at temperatures sufficient to cause skin burn. Ensure that these resistors
have cooled sufficiently after the power has been switched off before servicing.
1B.5.9 Dual Speed Starter Board
This symbol is printed on the dual speed starter board if fitted.

HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Approximately 600 VDC is present on this board. This voltage is
supplied from the DC bus capacitors in the HF power supply. USE EXTREME CAUTION
WHEN SERVICING, this voltage and current combination is lethal. Ensure that the DC bus
capacitors are fully discharged before servicing as these capacitors will hold a lethal charge for
5 minutes AFTER THE EQUIPMENT IS SWITCHED OFF.
WARNING: COMPONENTS BEHIND VARIOUS COVERS, AS NOTED IN THIS SECTION, REMAIN LIVE
EVEN WITH THE OPERATOR CONSOLE SWITCHED OFF. THE ONLY WAY TO REMOVE
POWER FROM THESE AREAS IS TO SWITCH OFF THE MAIN DISCONNECT.
1B.6.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES UNIQUE TO MILLENIA
1B.6.1 HT Tank - Transformer Terminals Label
This label indicates that if the power supply inverter leads that attach to the high tension transformer
primary terminals are not connected the generator must not be energized.
This label also cautions against over tightening the nuts on the transformer feedthrough terminals
mentioned in the above paragraph.
1B.6.2 Live Mains / Fuses / Ground Label
This label is attached to a cover over the main fuseblock and fuses. This area will have mains voltage
applied as long as the main disconnect is switched on. The main system ground is also located behind
this cover.
1B.6.3 Live Mains / Fuses Label
This label is attached to a cover over the fuseblock and fuses for the room interface transformer. This
area will have mains voltage applied as long as the main disconnect is switched on.
1B.6.4 Caution - Hazardous Voltages Label
CAUTION
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE
PRESENT INSIDE THE CABINET
FOR A PERIOD OF FIVE (5)
MINUTES AFTER DE-ENERGIZING
THIS EQUIPMENT.
This label is attached to the main access doors on the generator. Wait a minimum of five minutes after
the main power has been removed from the generator before opening the cabinet doors. This will
allow for internal capacitors to discharge to a safe level.
The upper door provides access to the HV power supply driver section, room interface board and
associated control circuits. The lower door allows access to the HT transformer, dual speed starter
chassis if fitted, line adjusting transformer if fitted, and access to the tube stator connections and thermal
switch connections. Additionally, the grounding location for the X-ray tube housing is located in this area.
Hazards associated with each area within are outlined in the relevant sections of this chapter.
1B.6.5 Warning / Caution / Caution Label
This label is attached to a cover over the dual speed starter assembly (if fitted). DC bus voltage is present
behind this panel, see 1B.5.9.
Ensure that the generator has been turned OFF for five minutes before removing the cover or
disconnecting the DC supply.
Replace fuses with the same type and rating, refer to spares list (chapter 8) for details.
1B.6.6 Tank Vent Label
This label is attached to the HT tank clamping bracket on generator models equipped with an HT tank
vent screw. This screw must be loosened to allow venting of the HT tank before use of the generator
when the tank is so equipped.
The screw must be fully tightened to prevent insulating oil spills or leaks from the HT tank during
transportation or shipping.
1B.6.7 mA Test Jacks Label
This label is attached to the top of the HT tank on generator models equipped with mA test jacks. A similar
warning is printed on tank lid boards using this connector, see 1B.7.8 below for details.
1B.6.8 mA test Jacks
This symbol is printed on tank lid boards with mA/mAs test jacks.
Replace the shorting jumper immediately after use. Do not attempt exposures without either
the shorting jumper in place, or an approved mA/mAs measuring device properly connected.
The warning “CAUTION: 48V MAX” printed on some tank lid boards does not apply in Millenia
generator applications.
1B.6.9 F3 (Auxiliary Power Fuseblock)
This symbol is on a label under the fuseholder for F3 (to the right of the HF power supply).
FUSE RATING: 3A 500V slow blow.
This fuse is only used if the generator is fitted with the neutral block option.
1B.7.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES UNIQUE TO INDICO 100
1B.7.1 Caution HV Exposed Label
This label is attached to the removable panels on the lower (power supply) cabinet. High voltage is
present within this cabinet at all times that the mains power is switched on.
1B.7.2 Caution HV Label
This label is attached to the power input board, and to the resonant board assembly. The input power
board has line voltage components attached that will be live at all times that the main disconnect is
switched on. This includes the input fuses, main line contactor, mains rectifier and associated
components.
The resonant board assembly has components that may be energized at all times that the
generator is on. These components may retain their charge for 5 minutes after the console is switched off,
or the main disconnect is switched off.
1B.7.3 Danger HV Label
This label is attached to the primary terminals on the HT oil tank. These terminals may be energized at all
times that the generator is switched on, and for 5 minutes after the console or the main disconnect is
switched off.
1B.7.4 High Voltage Warning Label
This label is attached to the inverter board(s) and to the low speed starter assembly if fitted. The inverter
assembly is connected to the main DC bus and will have high voltage applied at all times that the
generator is switched on. This assembly will remain energized for 5 minutes after the generator is
switched off, or the main disconnect is off.
Components on the low speed starter assembly will have 240 VAC applied when the console is
switched on.
1B.7.5 HT Tank - Transformer Terminals
This notice is printed on the HT oil tank lid and indicates that if the power supply inverter leads that attach
to the high tension transformer primary terminals are not connected the generator must not be energized.
This notice also cautions against over tightening the nuts on the transformer feedthrough terminals
mentioned in the above paragraph.
1B.7.6 Danger High Tension
This notice is printed on the HT oil tank lid. High voltage may be present at the primary terminals on the
tank lid board, at the output high voltage connectors, and at the mA/mAs measuring jacks if the shorting
link is opened for mA/mAs measurements.
CPI Canada Inc. Preparing for Installation 1C
CHAPTER 1 SECTION 1C
PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION

CONTENTS:
1C.1.0 INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................................................1C-2
1C.2.0 GENERATOR POWER REQUIREMENTS...............................................................................................1C-2
1C.2.1 30 kW Single Phase ..............................................................................................................................1C-2
1C.2.2 37.5 kW Single Phase ...........................................................................................................................1C-2
1C.2.3 30 kW Three Phase ...............................................................................................................................1C-2
1C.2.4 37.5 kW Three Phase ............................................................................................................................1C-3
1C.2.5 50 kW Three Phase ...............................................................................................................................1C-3
1C.2.6 65 kW Three Phase ...............................................................................................................................1C-3
1C.2.7 80 kW Three Phase ...............................................................................................................................1C-4
1C.2.8 Service Disconnect (All Models) ............................................................................................................1C-4
1C.3.0 POWER LINE REQUIREMENTS..............................................................................................................1C-5
1C.4.0 GROUND REQUIREMENTS. ...................................................................................................................1C-7
1C.5.0 OUTLINE DRAWINGS..............................................................................................................................1C-8
1C.5.1 Generator Outline ..................................................................................................................................1C-8
1C.5.2 Generator Shipping Containers: Dimensions ........................................................................................1C-8
1C.6.0 LOCATING THE GENERATOR CABINET AND CONTROLLER. ............................................................1C-9
1C.6.1 Locating The Equipment In The X-Ray Room. ....................................................................................1C-10
1C.7.0 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................1C-11
1C.8.0 CABLES SUPPLIED WITH THE INDICO 100 GENERATOR ................................................................1C-11
1C.9.0 PRE-INSTALLATION CHECK LISTS......................................................................................................1C-12
1C.9.1 Site Logistics........................................................................................................................................1C-12
1C.9.2 Installation Equipment..........................................................................................................................1C-12
Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-02 Rev. D Page 1C-1

1C Preparing for Installation CPI Canada Inc.
1C.1.0 INTRODUCTION
The following items must be considered before installing your generator:
• Power level of your generator.

• Power line requirements.
• Ground requirements.
• Physical placement of the generator.
• Environmental requirements for the generator.
• Cable runs from the generator to all room components: tables, buckys, X-ray
tubes etc.
1C.2.0 GENERATOR POWER REQUIREMENTS
1C.2.1 30 kW Single Phase
Line Voltage 230 VAC ± 10%, 1∅.

Line Frequency 50/60 Hz.
Momentary Current 200 Amps.
Standby Current 5 Amps.
1C.2.2 37.5 kW Single Phase
Line Voltage 230 VAC ± 10%, 1∅.

Momentary Current 240 Amps.
1C.2.3 30 kW Three Phase
Line Voltage 400 VAC ± 10%, 3∅ (for 400 VAC input generators).
480 VAC ± 10%, 3∅ with optional line adjusting transformer,
(for 400 VAC input generators).
480 VAC ± 10%, 3∅ (for 480 VAC input generators).
* SEE NOTE AT THE END OF 1C.2.7

Momentary Current 80 Amps/phase at 400 VAC.
67 Amps/phase at 480 VAC.
Page 1C-2 Rev. D Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-02

1C.2.4 37.5 kW Three Phase





*NOTE: THREE PHASE INDICO 100 GENERATORS ARE AVAILABLE IN 400 VAC AND 480 VAC
MODELS. 400 VAC MODELS MUST BE OPERATED FROM 400 VAC MAINS, OR MAY BE
OPERATED FROM 480 VAC MAINS WITH AN OPTIONAL LINE ADJUSTING
TRANSFORMER. 480 VAC MODELS MUST BE OPERATED FROM 480 VAC MAINS (THESE
ARE THE NOMINAL MAINS VOLTAGES, THE ALLOWED TOLERANCES ARE AS DETAILED
IN THE PREVIOUS TABLES).
1C.2.8 Service Disconnect (All Models)
Refer to the following table for recommended service disconnect ratings.

1C.3.0 POWER LINE REQUIREMENTS
The following table defines the room power requirements for the generators.
NOTE: THE FOLLOWING ARE TYPICAL VALUES AND ARE DEPENDENT ON CURRENT REQUIREMENTS AND LENGTH OF
CABLE RUN
Final selection of wire and disconnects must meet the requirements of the local electrical codes and is usually determined by
hospital/contractor engineering.
AC Mains Cable Size: Distribution Transformer Disconnect Momentary Service Distribution Ground Apparent
to Main Disconnect to Line Current Rating Transformer Wire Mains
2 Generator Rating Size Resistance
(AWG and mm )
(15 ft/5 m
max)
Mains 50 ft 100 ft 150 ft 200 ft
Voltage (15 m) (30 m) (45 m) (60 m)
∅ Generator
30 kW 1∅
230 VAC #0000 250MCM 300MCM 350MCM #4 200 A 100 A 45 kVA #4 0.05 Ω
2 2 2 2 2 2
(120 mm ) (150 mm ) (175 mm ) (200 mm ) (25 mm ) (25mm )
∅ Generator
37.5 kW 1∅
230 VAC #0000 300MCM 350MCM #4 240 A 120 A 55 kVa #4 0.04 Ω
2 2 2 2 2
(120mm ) (175mm ) (200mm ) (25 mm ) (25mm )
∅ Generator
30 kW 3∅
400 VAC #4 #3 #2 #0 #6 80 A 60 A 45 kVa #4 0.27 Ω
2 2 2 2 2 2
(25 mm ) (30 mm ) (35 mm ) (50 mm ) (15 mm ) (25mm )
480 VAC #4 #3 #2 #0 #6 67 A 60 A 45 kVa #4 0.40 Ω
2 2 2 2 2 2
(25 mm ) (30 mm ) (35 mm ) (50 mm ) (15 mm ) (25mm )

AC Mains Cable Size: Distribution Transformer Disconnect Momentary Service Distribution Ground Apparent
to Main Disconnect to Line Current Rating Transformer Wire Mains
2 Generator Rating Size Resistance
(AWG and mm )
(15 ft/5 m
max)
Mains 50 ft 100 ft 150 ft 200 ft
Voltage (15 m) (30 m) (45 m) (60 m)
∅ Generator
37.5 kW 3∅
400 VAC #4 #3 #2 #0 #6 95 A 100 A 55 kVA #4 0.22 Ω
2 2 2 2 2 2
(25 mm ) (30 mm ) (35 mm ) (50 mm ) (15 mm ) (25mm )
480 VAC #4 #3 #2 #0 #6 75 A 100 A 55 kVA #4 0.32 Ω
2 2 2 2 2 2
(25 mm ) (30 mm ) (35 mm ) (50 mm ) (15 mm ) (25mm )
∅ Generator
50 kW 3∅
400 VAC #2 #0 #000 #0000 #6 120 A 100 A 70 kVa #4 0.17 Ω
2 2 2 2 2 2
(35 mm ) (50 mm ) (95 mm ) (120 mm ) (15 mm ) (25mm )
480 VAC #2 #0 #000 #0000 #6 100 A 100 A 70 kVa #4 0.24 Ω
2 2 2 2 2 2
(35 mm ) (50 mm ) (95 mm ) (120 mm ) (15 mm ) (25mm )
∅ Generator
65 kW 3∅
400 VAC #2 #0 #000 #0000 #6 150 A 100 A 85 kVa #4 0.13 Ω
2 2 2 2 2 2
(35 mm ) (50 mm ) (95 mm ) (120 mm ) (15 mm ) (25mm )
480 VAC #2 #0 #000 #0000 #6 120 A 100 A 85 kVa #4 0.19 Ω
2 2 2 2 2 2
(35 mm ) (50 mm ) (95 mm ) (120 mm ) (15 mm ) (25mm )
∅ Generator
80 kW 3∅
400 VAC #2 #00 #0000 250MCM #6 200 A 100 A 100 kVa #4 0.11 Ω
2 2 2 2 2 2
(35 mm ) (70 mm ) (120 mm ) (150 mm ) (15 mm ) (25mm )
480 VAC #2 #00 #0000 250MCM #6 180 A 100 A 100 kVa #4 0.15 Ω
2 2 2 2 2 2
(35 mm ) (70 mm ) (120 mm ) (150 mm ) (15 mm ) (25mm )

1C.3.0 POWER LINE REQUIREMENTS (cont)
• All wiring and grounding should be in compliance with the national electrical code or
equivalent.
• All wiring must be copper.
2
• For all installations, a separate copper ground cable #4 AWG (25 mm ) is required
from the building distribution ground to the ground terminal located inside the main
disconnect switch fuse block.
• The disconnect switch shall be located within reach of the operator.
1C.4.0 GROUND REQUIREMENTS.

2
• A suitable flexible copper cable #6 AWG (15 mm ) or larger must be supplied (usually
part of the line cable) to connect from the disconnect switch to the main ground of the
generator, located to the left of the main fuseblock on the power input board.
2
• A copper ground cable, #10 AWG (6 mm ) or greater, from each X-ray tube’s housing
to be connected to the H.T. transformer’s ground stud (located at the top of the HT
transformer).
• If a neutral line is provided with the system under no circumstances is it to be used for
ground purposes. The ground conductor must carry fault currents only.

1C.5.0 OUTLINE DRAWINGS
1C.5.1 Generator Outline
Refer to chapter 1A for the Indico 100 generator outline.
1C.5.2 Generator Shipping Containers: Dimensions
The overall dimensions of the Indico 100 shipping pack are shown below.
Figure 1C-1: Generator shipping container

1C.6.0 LOCATING THE GENERATOR CABINET AND CONTROLLER.
The generator cabinet is self standing and does not need to be supported. However, the installation
should meet the following requirements:
• The floor must be flat and level.

• The floor must be capable of supporting a load of approximately 250 lbs (115 Kg).
• The generator installation area must be clean and free of dirt or debris.
• If required, the generator may be anchored to the floor via the hold-down brackets.
See Figure 1C-2.
• Sufficient room must be provided to allow access to the rear and side panels for
installation. Clearance must also be provided at both sides of the cabinet, at the front,
and at the rear of the upper cabinet to allow access for service. See Figure 1C-3 for
recommended clearances.
• A cable conduit should be provided from the control console to the generator cabinet
to allow routing of the control cable if required. Allow for a 2 inch conduit. See Figure
1C-4.
1.2 (31)
16.4 (417)
1 3.1 (333 )
TO P
4.1 (104)
V IE W
LE V E L LIN G
20.2 (513) FEET
(4 P L A C E S )
D IM E N S IO N S A R E IN IN C H E S (M M )
S PA C E R S
F ILE : IN _M T G .C D R S U P P LIE D B Y
C U S TO M E R
(4 P L A C E S )
Figure 1C-2: Anchoring plates for securing the generator

1C.6.1 Locating The Equipment In The X-Ray Room.
Figure 1C-3 shows recommended clearances around the generator. Figure 1C-4 shows recommended
clearances for through-the-wall cable routing.
36” (915 m m )
M IN IM U M
T H IS D IA G R A M S H O W S T H E
R E C O M M E D ED C LE AR A N C E S
AT T H E R E A R A N D SID E S O F
T H E G E N E R ATO R TO A L LO W
F O R IN S TA L LAT IO N A N D
M A IN T EN A N C E . IF T H E S E
D IM EN S IO N S M U ST B E
R E D U C E D , P LE A S E EN SU R E
S U F F IC IE N T C L EA R A N C E FO R
IN STA LLATIO N A N D
M A IN T EN A N C E O F T H E
G EN ER ATO R
M IN IM U M
36 ” (9 15 m m )
F ILE : I N_ SP A C E. C D R
Figure 1C-3: Generator clearances
TY P IC A L TH R O U G H
TH E W A LL IN S TA LL AT IO N
M IN IM U M
2” (5 1.0 m m )
F ILE : IN _ W A L L .C D R
Figure 1C-4: Typical through the wall installation

1C.7.0 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Listed below are the ventilation requirements for the Indico 100 series generator:
• Unrestricted air flow must be provided at the front and sides of the cabinet, as well as
underneath the unit.
• Do not allow storage on top of the cabinet.
• Typical heat output is 4000 BTU/hr (fluoro operation).
• Control console heat output is negligible (150 BTU/hr).
1C.8.0 CABLES SUPPLIED WITH THE INDICO 100 GENERATOR
Figure 1C-5 shows the cabling supplied with the generator:
• The cable supplied for the console is a 15 conductor cable with a standard length of
50 ft. (15 m).
• The cable supplied for the optional remote fluoro control is a 9 conductor cable with a
standard length of 50 ft. (15 m).
50 ' (15 M ) S U P P LIE D 50 ' (15 M ) S U P P LIE D
31 X 42 C M
C O N S O LE
IN D IC O 10 0 G E N E R ATO R S
USE O NE OF THE TW O
G E N ER ATO R C O N S O L E S T Y LE S
C A BINE T S H O W N IN T H IS F IG U R E
R E M O TE FL U O R O
(O P TIO NA L)
23 X 56 C M C O N S O LE
Figure 1C-5: Cabling supplied with generator

1C.9.0 PRE-INSTALLATION CHECK LISTS
The following checklists are provided to help the installer during a pre-installation site visit, prior to
installing the generator:
• Site logistics
• Installation equipment
1C.9.1 Site Logistics
Before starting the generator installation, review the following checklist for site logistics.
CHECK √ DESCRIPTION
Is there an unloading area to transport the generator from the delivery
truck to the inside of the building?
If the installation is not on the same floor as the delivery entrance, is there
an elevator available?
Are all halls and doorways large enough to allow the generator to pass
through?
Is there a transport dolly or similar device to move the Generator? It must
have a minimum rating of 250 lb. (115 Kg.)
Do any regulatory bodies need to be notified prior to installation?
If movers are required, have arrangements for time and equipment been
completed?
Are lifting straps or some other suitable device available to lift the
generator off the shipping pallet?
1C.9.2 Installation Equipment
The following is a checklist of recommended tools and test equipment for installation and calibration of the
generator.
CHECK √ DESCRIPTION
General handtools for installation: Wrenches, nut drivers, assortment of
screwdrivers, pliers, etc.
If the generator is to be anchored to the floor, suitable hardware and drills,
drill bits etc must be available.
A supply of connectors for wiring: lugs, caps, line splices etc.
A calibrated DVM which indicates true RMS voltages.
Dual trace memory oscilloscope with a minimum 20 MHz bandwidth;
appropriate leads, probes, etc.
Device for measuring true kVp and mA (mAs). This may be a Dynalyzer
equivalent or a non-invasive system such as the Keithly TRIAD system.
A calibrated radiation meter with detectors that will allow for R/min and uR
type measurements (or uGy and Gy/min).
A strobe or reed type tachometer to verify that the anode is rotating up to
speed.
A sufficient selection of patient absorbers to allow AEC and ABS
calibration. A suggested selection is 3/4 inch Al (quantity 2); 1 mm of Cu
(quantity 8), Water in containers of 5.0. 10.0, 15.0 cm thickness.
Test phantoms to verify the imaging system with the generator.

CPI Canada Inc Compatibility Listing 1D
CHAPTER 1
SECTION 1D
COMPATIBILITY LISTING
CONTENTS:
Section Title
1D.1.0 INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................................................1D-1
1D.2.0 COMPATIBLE DEVICES AND OPTIONS ..................................................................................................1D-2
1D.2.1 X-Ray Tubes..........................................................................................................................................1D-2
1D.2.2 Stators ...................................................................................................................................................1D-2
1D.2.3 AEC Devices..........................................................................................................................................1D-2
1D.2.4 ABS Pickups ..........................................................................................................................................1D-2
1D.2.5 Tomographic Tables ..............................................................................................................................1D-2
1D.2.6 Digital Interfaces (R&F Generators) ......................................................................................................1D-2
1D.2.7 Options ..................................................................................................................................................1D-2
1D.3.0 X-RAY TUBE DATA ..................................................................................................................................1D-3
1D.4.0 CUSTOMER PRODUCT DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................1D-4
1D.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This section details external equipment which is compatible with your specific generator, and lists options
which are included in that generator.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-02 Rev. A Page 1D-1
1D Compatibility Listing CPI Canada Inc
1D.2.0 COMPATIBLE DEVICES AND OPTIONS
The Millenia and Indico 100 family of generators may be factory or user configured to be compatible with
various external devices. Certain features must be factory configured, others are user configurable.
Please refer to chapter 2 and 3 of this manual and/or consult the factory for further specifics.
1D.2.1 X-Ray Tubes
Various makes and models of inserts and housings are supported.
CAUTION: PLEASE ENSURE THAT THE X-RAY TUBE INSERT IS AS STATED ON THE PRODUCT
DESCRIPTION.
IF THE HOUSING HAS BEEN RELOADED WITH ANOTHER INSERT TYPE, CALIBRATION
MAY BE SERIOUSLY AFFECTED AND MAY CAUSE TUBE DAMAGE.
1D.2.2 Stators
Various types/impedances of stators are supported.
1D.2.3 AEC Devices
Various AEC devices (ionization, solid state or PMT) may be supported via the optional AEC board,
depending on configuration.
1D.2.4 ABS Pickups
Various ABS pickups (light diode, composite video, PMT, etc) are supported on R&F generators
depending on configuration.
1D.2.5 Tomographic Tables
Various. Please note that the generator is used as a backup timer ONLY in tomography.
AEC is NOT available for tomography.
1D.2.6 Digital Interfaces (R&F Generators)
The generator may be configured to be compatible with various digital imaging systems
1D.2.7 Options
Major options include AEC board, remote fluoro control unit, dual speed starter, line adjusting transformer,
and two tube HT transformer.
Page 1D-2 Rev. A Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-02
NOTE: REFER TO THE PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AT THE END OF THIS

SECTION FOR COMPATIBILITY OF YOUR SPECIFIC GENERATOR
1D.3.0 X-RAY TUBE DATA
PLEASE INSERT THE TUBE RATING CHARTS FOR THE X-RAY TUBES USED WITH
THIS GENERATOR.
• TUBE #1:
Type:
Serial No.:
Stator Type:
• TUBE #2:
Type:
Serial No.:
Stator Type:
1D.4.0 CUSTOMER PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
The customer product description for this generator follows this page.
REPLACE THIS PAGE WITH
"CUSTOMER PRODUCT DESCRIPTION. PAGE 2”
REPLACE THIS PAGE WITH
"CUSTOMER PRODUCT DESCRIPTION. PAGE 3”
CPI Canada Inc Generator Layout and Major Components 1E
CHAPTER 1 SECTION 1E
GENERATOR LAYOUT AND

MAJOR COMPONENTS
CONTENTS:
1E.1.0 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................... 1E-1

1E.2.0 MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT ........................................................................................................... 1E-2
1E.2.1 Generator Cabinet Assembly.............................................................................................................. 1E-2
1E.2.2 Console Assembly .............................................................................................................................. 1E-4
1E.2.3 Remote Fluoro Control........................................................................................................................ 1E-6
1E.2.4 Dual Speed Starter EPROM location.................................................................................................. 1E-6
1E.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This section contains generator layout drawings and figures which identify the major generator components and
circuit board Assemblies.
This section also shows the location and correct orientation of the power EPROM (located on the
generator CPU board, the console EPROM (located on the console CPU board), and the dual speed starter
EPROM (located on the dual speed starter board if the dual speed starter option is used). Refer to the applicable
figures to ensure correct EPROM placement and orientation should EPROM replacement be necessary.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-03 Rev. C Page 1E-1

1E Generator Layout and Major Components CPI Canada Inc
1E.2.0 MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT
1E.2.1 Generator Cabinet Assembly
The following major assemblies are located within the generator cabinet:
• Auxiliary power supply

• Generator control circuits
• Room interface for the X-ray system
• Low speed starter or optional dual speed starter
• High frequency inverter
• H.T. transformer
• Optional AEC board (automatic exposure control)
Figure 1E-1 shows the major components within the front and right side of the generator cabinet. Figure
1E-2 shows the major components accessible from the left side and the rear of the generator cabinet.
U38
EPRO M
U41
EPRO M
Figure 1E-1: Major generator subassemblies & power EPROM location
Page 1E-2 Rev. C Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-03

1E.2.1 Generator Cabinet Assembly (Cont)
Figure 1E-2: Major generator subassemblies (right side and rear)

1E.2.2 Console Assembly
Figure 1E-3 is an overview of both the 23 X 56 cm console, and the 31 X 42 cm console styles for Indico
100 generators. Figure 1E-4 is an internal view of both of these console styles, showing the major
components and cabling in the console assembly.
INDICO 100
F IL E : IN _C O N 1 .C D R
Figure 1E-3: Console top view

1E.2.2 Console Assembly (Cont)
C O N SO LE EPR OM
(NO T E O RIEN TATIO N )
N O T T O S C A LE
J6
C O N SO LE BASE
U 26
EPROM
J10
J8 J9
C O N SO LE CPU BO AR D
C O N SO LE DISP LAY
BO ARD
J1 J2 J3
LC D D IS PL AY A SS E M B LY
C O N SO LE TOP
LC D D IS PL AY A SS E M B LY
J6
J10
U22
C O N SO LE EPR OM C O N SO LE BO A RD
(NO T E O RIEN TATIO N )
EPROM
F IL E : IN _ _C O N B .C D R
Figure 1E-4: Console internal view including EPROM location

1E.2.3 Remote Fluoro Control
Figure 1E-5 is an overview of the optional remote fluoro control for the Indico 100 generators. This allows
operation of fluoro functions from a location other than the main console.
Figure 1E-5: Remote fluoro control unit overview
1E.2.4 Dual Speed Starter EPROM location
Figure 1E-6: EPROM location inside the dual speed starter

CPI Canada Inc. Installation 2
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
CONTENTS:
2.1.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 2-2

2.2.0 RECEIVING ................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.1 Major Shipping Assemblies ........................................................................................................................ 2-3
2.3.0 REMOVAL FROM PACK ............................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.3.1 Lifting The Generator ................................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.4.0 REMOVING THE EXTERNAL COVERS ....................................................................................................... 2-5
2.5.0 LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER............................................................................................................. 2-8
2.6.0 MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.7.0 INSPECTING THE HT TANK ........................................................................................................................ 2-8
2.8.0 EQUIPMENT PLACEMENT........................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.8.1 Equipment Cabinet ..................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.8.2 Control Console.......................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.8.3 Anchoring The Generator To The Floor ..................................................................................................... 2-9
2.8.4 Leveling ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.9.0 WIRING TO THE GENERATOR ................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.9.1 Control Console.......................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.9.2 Remote Fluoro Control (Optional) ............................................................................................................ 2-10
2.9.3 Hand Switch Installation ........................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.9.4 X-Ray Tube Stator & Thermal Switch Connections ................................................................................. 2-12
2.9.5 Generator Mains Connection ................................................................................................................... 2-13
2.10.0 X-RAY TUBE HOUSING GROUND........................................................................................................... 2-14
2.11.0 HIGH TENSION CABLES.......................................................................................................................... 2-14
2.12.0 PROGRAMMING THE LOW SPEED STARTER ...................................................................................... 2-16
2.12.1 Low Speed Starter Tube Select Table ................................................................................................... 2-16
2.13.0 PROGRAMMING THE DUAL SPEED STARTER ..................................................................................... 2-18
2.13.1 Setting tube type..................................................................................................................................... 2-18
2.13.2 Confirming/Changing DSS Starter Type ................................................................................................ 2-21
2.13.3 Dual Speed Starter Tube Select Table................................................................................................... 2-22
2.14.0 GENERATOR LOCKOUT SWITCH .......................................................................................................... 2-27
2.15.0 SAFETY INTERLOCKS ............................................................................................................................. 2-28
2.16.0 CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE ........................................................................... 2-28
2.17.0 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS........................................................................................................................... 2-31
2.18.0 INITIAL RUN-UP........................................................................................................................................ 2-31
2.18.1 Initial Voltage Measurements ................................................................................................................. 2-31
2.18.2 Initial Power Up ...................................................................................................................................... 2-33
2.19.0 PROGRAMMING AND CALIBRATION USING THE CONSOLE .............................................................. 2-34
2.19.1 Entering Into Programming/Calibration Mode ........................................................................................ 2-34
2.19.2 Menu Selections ..................................................................................................................................... 2-35
2.20.0 TUBE AUTO CALIBRATION ..................................................................................................................... 2-37
Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-04 Rev. H Page 2-1

2 Installation CPI Canada Inc.
2.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains instructions for unpacking, positioning, and cabling the Indico 100 series of
generators to allow initial operation and calibration. The instructions in this chapter allows the installation
engineer to:
• Install the generator and control console.
• Install the optional remote fluoro control.
• Connect power.
• Calibrate one or two X-ray tube(s), depending on the generator model, without completing the room
interface connections. This allows for simpler installation and troubleshooting on the generator itself.
2.2.0 RECEIVING
WARNING: THE INDICO 100 GENERATOR CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING ITEMS: UPPER AND
LOWER CABINETS (FACTORY ASSEMBLED), CONTROL CONSOLE, AND AN OPTIONAL
REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL.
THE COMPLETE GENERATOR WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 250 POUNDS (115 KG) IN ITS
SHIPPING CONTAINER.
THE OPTIONAL LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER IS SUPPLIED IN A SEPARATE
ENCLOSURE, THE WEIGHT OF THAT ASSEMBLY IS APPROXIMATELY 100 POUNDS (45
KG).
THE OIL TANK IS LOCATED IN THE LOWER (POWER SUPPLY) CABINET. ONE PERSON
SHOULD NOT ATTEMPT TO LIFT OR MOVE THE GENERATOR ASSEMBLY OR OPTIONAL
LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER WITHOUT ADEQUATE ASSISTANCE OR PROPER
EQUIPMENT.
Page 2-2 Rev. H Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-04

2.2.1 Major Shipping Assemblies
Refer to figure 1A-2 (chapter 1A). This shows the upper (control cabinet) and lower (power supply) cabinet
fully assembled, along with the control console and optional remote fluoro control unit.
2.3.0 REMOVAL FROM PACK
1. Inspect the pack for evidence of shipping damage. If there is evidence of shipping damage, note
this in the event that a damage claim is justified.
2. Locate any documentation attached to the outside of the cardboard sleeve. Be sure to read and
understand this documentation before unpacking the generator. Then set this documentation
aside temporarily until it can be transferred to a storage location close to the generator for future
reference.
3. Remove the cardboard outer pack(s).
CAUTION: OPEN THE CARDBOARD PACK(S) CAREFULLY. SHARP TOOLS MAY DAMAGE THE
CONTENTS.
4. Set aside the cardboard pack(s).
5. Unscrew the bolts that secure the generator to the shipping pallet. Carefully lift the generator from
the pallet. Refer to 2.3.1 for the procedure for lifting the generator.
6. Inspect for internal and external shipping damage. Refer to 2.4.0 for instructions for removing the
external covers.
7. Unscrew the levelling feet at the bottom of the generator by a minimum of 1 1/2″ (35 mm). This
will provide the required air flow underneath the generator cabinet and allow room to make
levelling adjustments when the generator is placed in its final location.
8. Remove and unpack the control console, the optional line adjusting transformer if used, the
optional remote fluoro control if used, and the optional handswitch kit if included, and check these
items for any damage.
9. Remove and unpack the manuals and any other paperwork that may be packed with the
generator.
10. Keep the shipping containers. In case of shipping damage, place the unit(s) back in its shipping
pack and notify the carrier and the customer support group at CPI Canada Inc.

2.3.1 Lifting The Generator
One of the following methods is recommended for lifting or maneuvering the generator. Since the
generator weighs more that 30 kg (65 lbs), proper lifting equipment should be used or additional help
should be obtained to lift the unit. Refer to figure 1E-1 and figure 2-2 for identification of the panels
referenced below.
• Lifting straps can be used along with a hoist to raise the generator. The straps should be placed
underneath the generator cabinet and along the four sides to properly support the cabinet as it is
raised.
• Remove the lower front access panel and the lower wiring access panel from the generator cabinet
(refer to 2.4.0 - removing the external covers). The metal cross brace found at the front of the cabinet
(below the circuit board mounting panel) may be used, in conjunction with the lip at the upper edge of
the opening for the lower wiring access panel, as lifting points. Two people (one on each side) will be
required to lift or maneuver the generator cabinet.
Figure 2-1: Generator lifting points

2.4.0 REMOVING THE EXTERNAL COVERS
NOTE: A POTENTIAL HAZARD EXISTS TO OPERATORS, SERVICE PERSONNEL, OR TO THE

EQUIPMENT IF THE GENERATOR IS OPERATED WITH ANY OF THE GROUND LEADS TO
THE EXTERNAL COVERS DISCONNECTED OR IMPROPERLY CONNECTED.
BE SURE TO PROPERLY RECONNECT ALL GROUND LEADS AFTER COMPLETING
ANY PROCEDURE THAT REQUIRES THEIR REMOVAL.
REFER TO FIGURE 2-2 FOR IDENTIFICATION OF COVERS/PANELS DESCRIBED IN THIS

SECTION.
Lower Access Panels
Remove the two screws at the bottom of the panel to be removed. Carefully lower the panel such as to
allow the locating tabs at the top of the panel to clear the slots in the lip of the frame. The panel may then
be lifted away from the frame.
If it is required to temporarily remove the ground wire connected to the panel, remove the nut that
secures the ground lead to the cabinet frame and then disconnect the ring terminal.
Reverse the above steps to reconnect the ground wire(s), and to reinstall the access panel(s).
Lower Wiring Access Panel
THIS PANEL IS NOT FITTED IF THE OPTIONAL WIRING CHANNELS ARE USED.
Remove the screw from the upper right hand corner of the panel. Pull out the snaps on the three nylon
fasteners such as to release the panel. Remove the panel from the generator.
Upper Wiring Access Panel
THIS PANEL IS NOT FITTED IF THE OPTIONAL WIRING CHANNELS ARE USED.
Pull out the snaps on the two nylon fasteners, then remove the screws from the upper left hand and upper
right hand corners of the panel. Remove the panel from the generator.
If it is required to temporarily remove the ground wire connected to the panel, remove the nut that
secures the ground lead to the access panel and then disconnect the ring terminal.
Reverse the above steps to reconnect the ground wire(s), and to reinstall the access panel(s).

2.4.0 REMOVING THE EXTERNAL COVERS (Cont)
Upper Cabinet Hood
Most adjustments and servicing of the generator can be done by flipping back the hood. It is rarely
necessary to completely remove the hood. However, both procedures are detailed below:
Flipping back the hood
Remove the upper wiring channel if fitted. The procedure for doing this is detailed later in this subsection.
Remove screws A and B (shown in figure 2-2) on both sides of the hood. Loosen screw C on both sides of
the hood by 1-2 turns.
Lift up on the front of the hood, allowing the hood to pivot on screws C. The hood should be
supported when flipped open such that the hood does not exert excess pressure on the back of the
cabinet.
Removing the hood
With the hood flipped back, disconnect the ground wire at the base of the upper cabinet by removing the
nut on the cabinet frame that secures the ground lead, and then disconnecting the ring terminal that
secures the ground lead. Lower the hood back to its normal position and remove the two upper screws (C
in figure 2-2). Firmly grip the sides of the hood and slide the hood away from the rest of the cabinet.
Be sure to properly re-connect the ground lead when the hood is replaced.
Upper & Lower Wiring Channels
The wiring channels are optional. If the wiring channels are fitted, the upper and lower wiring access
panels will not be used.
Upper wiring channel
Refer to the instructions for removing the UPPER WIRING ACCESS PANEL on the previous page.
Lower wiring channel
Remove the screw from the upper left hand and upper right hand corners of the panel. Then slide the
wiring channel up such that the shoulder rivets clear the keyhole slot at the bottom of the cabinet. The
lower wiring channel may then be removed from the generator.

2.4.0 REMOVING THE EXTERNAL COVERS (Cont)
Figure 2-2: Removable external covers on generator cabinet

2.5.0 LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER
An optional line adjusting transformer is available if required to allow 480 VAC generators to operate from
400 VAC mains, or to allow 400 VAC generators to be operated from 480 VAC mains. The line adjusting
transformer is supplied in a separate enclosure. Please consult the factory for further details regarding this
option.
2.6.0 MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT
Refer to chapter 1E for major component identification and layout.
2.7.0 INSPECTING THE HT TANK
Before continuing with the installation of the generator, the HT oil tank should be inspected as per the
following steps:
• Verify that there is no obvious shipping damage to the tank (i.e. dents to the tank surface).
• Carefully check the inside of the generator cabinet and the HT tank for evidence of any oil loss. Refer
to chapter 6 if it is suspected that there has been some loss of oil.
• Verify that the clamps supporting the HT oil tank are tight.
• Verify that all the connections to the tank lid are secure.
• Verify that the rubber vent plug on the top of the tank is snug.
2.8.0 EQUIPMENT PLACEMENT
2.8.1 Equipment Cabinet
Place the equipment cabinet in a location that will allow the following:
• Easy front and side access for service and sufficient clearance at the rear for room interface cables.
Refer to chapter 1C.
• Air circulation - a minimum height of 1 1/2″ (35 mm) is recommended to allow airflow underneath the
generator.
• Stable footing - the leveling feet at the bottom of the cabinet will be used to prevent movement during
normal operation.
• Close proximity to service disconnect boxes - cables should not be on the floor where they could be
stepped on.
2.8.2 Control Console
Locate the control console in its intended position and ensure that it is stable. Refer to chapter 1C:
• If the console is located on a shelf, supply index pins or equivalent hardware to the base of the
console to prevent slipping.
• Ensure that the console is mounted at a height and angle to allow easy viewing of the displays.
• If the optional CPI pedestal stand is to be used for the console mounting, follow the mounting
instructions supplied with the stand.
• Leave sufficient slack in the cabling to the console to allow for future service and maintenance.

2.8.2 Control Console (Cont)
NOTE: DO NOT LOCATE THE CONTROL CONSOLE WHERE X-RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT
DURING INSTALLATION OR OPERATION.
YOU MAY CHOOSE TO TEMPORARILY LOCATE THE CONSOLE NEAR TO THE GENERATOR FOR
INITIAL PROGRAMMING AND CALIBRATION. IF THIS IS SO, PLEASE COMPLETE THE FINAL
CONSOLE INSTALLATION PER THIS SECTION WHEN THE GENERATOR INSTALLATION IS
COMPLETED.
2.8.3 Anchoring The Generator To The Floor
If it is desired to anchor the generator to the floor, refer to chapter 1C. This should not be done until all
cable hookups are completed which require rear access to the generator.
2.8.4 Leveling
Adjust the leveling feet such that the generator is level and stable. This adjustment must be made for both
anchored and free-standing generator installations. As noted in 2.3.0, the leveling feet must be unscrewed
by a minimum of 1 1/2″ (35 mm) to allow for proper air flow underneath the generator.
2.9.0 WIRING TO THE GENERATOR
1. Connect the 15 conductor console cable from J5 at the rear of the console to J4 of the generator
interface board. Ensure that the screw locks are fully tightened to secure the connectors. Refer to
figure 2-11 for the location of J4 on the generator interface board.
2
2. Connect a separate ground wire, #14 AWG (2.3 mm ) or larger, from the ground stud on the rear of
the console (marked CONSOLE GROUND in figure 2-3) to the ground stud located to the left of the
main fuse block on the power input board. This is marked GROUND in figure 2-7.
3. Figure 2-3 shows the designations and functions of the connectors on the rear panel of the 23 X 56
(cm) and the 31 X 42 (cm) control console.
Do not connect unapproved equipment to the rear of the console. For the 23 X 56 (cm)
console, J5 is used for the interconnect cable to the generator main cabinet, J4 is not used,
J2 is a serial port for use by an external computer, and J1 is for connection of an optional
printer.
For the 31 X 42 (cm) console, J5 is used for the interconnect cable to the generator main
cabinet, J2 is a serial port for use by an external computer, and J13 is for connection of an
external hand switch and / or foot switch. INCORRECT CONNECTIONS OR USE OF
UNAPPROVED EQUIPMENT MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.

2.9.1 Control Console (Cont)
J5 J4 R2 J2 J1
G E N E R ATO R LC D C O N S O LE D ATA
IN T ER FA C E CON TRAST GRO UND LIN K
TO J4 O F G E N E R ATO R
IN T E R FA C E B O A R D
PA R T O F H A N D
S W IT C H (O P T IO N A L)
J2 C O N SO L E J5
GRO UND J1 3
D ATA L IN K G E N E R ATO R E XT ER N A L
LCD IN T E R FAC E
C O N T R AS T S W IT C H
F ILE : IN _C O N C B .C D R
Figure 2-3: Rear of control console
2.9.2 Remote Fluoro Control (Optional)
1. Connect the free end of the 9 conductor remote fluoro cable (from the optional remote fluoro
control box) to J11 of the generator CPU board. Ensure that the screw locks are fully tightened to
secure the connector. Refer to figure 2-4 for the location of J11 on the generator CPU board.
Figure 2-4: Remote fluoro connector on generator CPU board

2.9.3 Hand Switch Installation
FOR 23 X 56 (CM) CONSOLES: The optional hand switch is supplied as a kit which must be user
installed. If this option is used, refer to separate installation instructions packaged along with the hand
switch.
For reference, a drawing is supplied in this section showing the hand switch connections to the
console CPU board. See figure 2-5.
Figure 2-5: Hand switch connections on console CPU board
FOR 31 X 42 (CM) CONSOLES: The optional hand switch, if ordered from CPI Canada Inc, is supplied
pre-wired to a male 9 pin subminiature ‘D’ connector. This connects to J13 on the rear of the console.
Fluoro foot switch connections may also be made to this connector. The table below shows the pin
designations for J13. A male 9 pin subminiature ‘D’ connector will need to be provided by the installer if
the CPI supplied hand switch is not used.
J13 PIN NUMBER DESCRIPTION

1 Hand Switch: X-Ray
2 No Connection
3 Hand Switch: Prep
4 No Connection
5 Hand Switch: Common (ground)
6 No Connection
7 Foot Switch: ‘live’ terminal
8 No Connection
9 Foot Switch: ‘ground’ terminal

2.9.4 X-Ray Tube Stator & Thermal Switch Connections
Refer to figure 2-6 for the X-ray tube stator and thermal switch connections.
1. Route the X-ray tube stator cable(s) through the lower wiring access panel panel on the rear of
the generator cabinet, then route the cables towards the stator terminal blocks as shown in the
figure below.
FOR UNITS WITH A LOW SPEED STARTER, SHIELDED STATOR CABLES ARE
RECOMMENDED. FOR UNITS WITH A DUAL SPEED STARTER, SHIELDED STATOR
CABLES MUST BE USED.
THE SHIELD FOR THE STATOR CABLE(S) MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED AT
THE CHASSIS GROUND STUD(S) SHOWN IN FIGURE 2-6.
2. Connect the wires to the appropriate terminal as shown. The tube thermal switch will normally be
connected to the THERMAL SWITCH connections on the stator terminal block, but may optionally
be connected to the room interface board (refer to chapter 3B).
3. Ensure that all terminal connections are tight, then dress and secure the cables.
NOTE: ONE TUBE ONLY GENERATORS WILL HAVE 1 STATOR TERMINAL BLOCK FITTED. THE
LOWER TERMINAL BLOCK IN FIGURE 2-6 IS ONLY FITTED ON TWO TUBE GENERATORS.
Figure 2-6: Stator connections to generator

2.9.5 Generator Mains Connection
WARNING: TO AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCK, ENSURE THAT THE AC MAINS DISCONNECT IS LOCKED
IN THE OFF POSITION, AND THAT ALL MAINS CABLES ARE DE-ENERGIZED BEFORE
CONNECTING TO THE GENERATOR.
Refer to chapter 1C for generator power and generator power line requirements.
1. Pass the AC mains cable through the access hole located at the lower rear of the generator.
2. Use an appropriate cable clamp to secure the mains cable at the cabinet entrance.
3. Temporarily remove the safety cover from the main fuses. Strip sufficient cable jacket to allow the
ground wire to reach the main ground connector located at the left side of the main fuse block.
Refer to figure 2-7.
4. Connect the ground wire to the chassis ground connector, and connect the mains wires to the
terminals on the bottom of the main fuseholder (3 wires for 3 phase systems, 2 wires for single
phase systems). Be sure to replace the main fuse safety cover after all connections are made and
properly tightened.
5. DO NOT SWITCH ON MAINS POWER AT THIS TIME.
Figure 2-7: Generator mains connections

2.10.0 X-RAY TUBE HOUSING GROUND

2
A separate ground wire (10 AWG, 6mm ) must be connected from each X-ray tube housing to one of the
ground studs on the HT tank. Refer to figure 2-8 or 2-9. These ground locations may have other ground
wires already connected, ensure that these existing ground wires are not disconnected when making the
X-ray tube ground connection.
Failure to make this ground connection may result in intermittent operation and/or exposure errors.
2.11.0 HIGH TENSION CABLES
The X-ray tube(s) should be mounted on their normal fixtures i.e. tube stand, G.I. table or other devices.
1. Verify that the HT cable terminations are clean, in good condition i.e. no cracks, and coated with
vapor proof compound.
2. Remove the plastic caps which cover the high voltage terminals on the HT tank. These should be
saved in case of a future requirement to transport the generator or HT tank.
3. Connect the high tension cables as per the installation requirements. Use the right angle
connectors for the HT transformer end. Ensure that the cables for tube 1 (and tube 2 if used) are
plugged into the proper connectors on the HT tank. Refer to figure 2-8 and 2-9.
4. Be sure that the HT cable connectors are tight and there is no play between the connector
insulator and the screw down ring.

2.11.0 HIGH TENSION CABLES (cont)
Figure 2-8: HV connectors (1 tube tanks)
Figure 2-9: HV connectors (2 tube tanks)

2.12.0 PROGRAMMING THE LOW SPEED STARTER
This section applies only to units fitted with the low speed starter.
PLEASE BE SURE TO READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS SECTION FULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING.
The low speed starter boost and run voltages are fixed at nominally 240 VAC and 50 VAC respectively.
The phase shift capacitor is fixed at 25 uF. Therefore, the low speed starter is capable of operating the “R”
type stator tubes listed in table 2-1 only.
If the desired tube type is not listed, please contact CPI product support for assistance.
WARNING: 240 VAC IS PRESENT ON THE LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD AT ALL TIMES THAT THE
GENERATOR IS SWITCHED ON. TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING
THIS BOARD
2.12.1 Low Speed Starter Tube Select Table
TABLE 2-1: TUBE TYPES (LOW

SPEED STARTER)
TUBE TYPE TUBE TYPE
(HOUSING) (INSERT)
Comet DO7 DX7
25/50 Ω stator
Comet DO9 DX9 0.6/2.0
25/50 Ω stator DX9 1.2/2.0
Comet DO9 DX91HS
25/50 Ω stator DX92HS
DX93HS
Comet DO10 DX10HS 0.6/1.0
25/50 Ω stator DX10HS 1.0/2.0
Comet DX10 DX101HS
25/50 Ω stator DX104HS
DX105HS
Comet XST-8
XSTAR8 XST-74
XSTAR74
25/50 Ω stator
Gilardoni AR11-30
Rotagil S/AS AR30-60
Picker PX1302
PX1300 PX1312
3” anode
Std “R stator”
Picker PX1429
PX1400 PX1431
4” anode PX1436
Std “R” stator PX1482
Philips RO 17/50
ROT350 SRO 22/50
ROT351 SRO 33/100

2.12.1 Low Speed Starter Tube Select Table (Cont)
TUBE TYPE TUBE TYPE

(HOUSING) (INSERT)
Toshiba E7132X
Rotanode
XH-121
Varian A102
B100 A132
DX52 A142
Std “R” stator
Varian A102
B100 A132
“STD” stator A142
Varian A192
B130 A272
B150 A282
Std “R” stator A286
A292
G256
G292
Varian RAD13
Diamond RAD14 0.3/1.2
Std “R” stator RAD14 0.6/1.2
RAD14 0.6/1.5
Varian RAD 8
Emerald RAD 68
Std “R” stator RAD 74
Varian RAD21
Saphire RAD56 0.6/1.0
RAD60
RAD92
RAD94
Varian DX62 A192B
300-400 kHu, A197
A272
A282
A286
A292
Varian DX62U A192B
Universal A197
300-400 kHu, A256
configured as A272
“STD” or “R” A282
stator A286
A292

2.13.0 PROGRAMMING THE DUAL SPEED STARTER
This section applies only to units fitted with the dual speed starter option.
The dual speed starter must be programmed for the X-ray tube type(s) used at this site. This is done via
DIP switches SW1 and SW2 on the dual speed starter.
The following tube functions are set with these switches:

• High speed start and run voltages
• Low speed start and run voltages
• Brake time and brake voltage (high speed)
• Boost times
• Boost time increments. Boost time may be increased in 100 ms steps in the range of 100 to 700 ms
SW1 and SW2 on the dual speed starter must be set correctly to match the X-ray tube(s) in
use. Failure to set these correctly may result in improper anode RPM and therefore may
damage the X-ray tube.
PLEASE BE SURE TO READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS SECTION FULLY BEFORE
PROCEEDING.
2.13.1 Setting tube type
1. Select the desired tube type from table 2-3. Record the tube type number (housing and insert) and
the binary code as per the third column in the table. Please note that the tube compatibility applies
only to the housing and inserts listed, i.e. for the specific manufacturer(s) shown.
2. If the desired tube type is not listed, please contact CPI product support for assistance.
3. The generator is factory configured to support one type of stator only (for example “R” type stator),
therefore only stators of that type may be used with this generator. Refer to the customer product
description form in chapter 1D of this manual for compatible X-ray tubes.
REFER TO SECTION 2.13.2 IF IT IS DESIRED TO USE TUBES WITH STATOR TYPES NOT
COMPATIBLE WITH THIS GENERATOR, OR IF YOU ARE NOT CERTAIN THAT THIS
GENERATOR IS COMPATIBLE WITH THE STATOR IN YOUR TUBE.
4. Refer to figure 2-10. Set the DIP switch SW1 (for tube 1) with the binary code for the selected
tube. The binary code shown in the table programs the tube type (housing and insert), for
example housing type Varian Diamond with standard “R” stator and inserts per table 2-3 requires
SW1-1 to be set OFF, SW1-2 OFF, SW1-3 ON, SW1-4 OFF and SW1-5 OFF. This programs the
voltages, brake times, and boost times in table 2-3.
Additionally, SW1-6 to SW1-8 may be set to give incremental increases in boost time over
the preselected values (for example to run an older tube with worn bearings). For example, binary
000 gives zero increase, binary 001 gives 100 ms increase, binary 100 gives 400 ms increase,
and binary 111 gives a 700 ms increase in boost time. SW1-6 represents bit 1, SW1-7 bit 2, and
SW1-8 represents bit 3.
EXAMPLE:
Binary 100 = decimal 4 = 400 ms incremental boost time increase:
1 0 0
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1
SW1-8 SW1-7 SW1-6

2.13.1 Setting tube type (cont)
5. The example DIP switch setting shown in figure 2-10 is for the example in step 4 with an
incremental increase in boost time of 200 ms.
6. If this is a two-tube installation, repeat steps 1 to 4 using DIP switch SW2 for the second tube.
7. Please confirm all settings using a suitable tachometer to ensure proper anode RPM before
making any exposures.
NOTE: FOR TUBES WHERE “LOW SPEED OPERATION ONLY” IS INDICATED, THE DUAL SPEED
STARTER MUST BE PROGRAMMED FOR LOW SPEED ONLY, AND WHERE “HIGH SPEED
OPERATION ONLY” IS INDICATED, THE DUAL SPEED STARTER MUST BE PROGRAMMED
FOR HIGH SPEED OPERATION ONLY. REFER TO THE TUBE SELECTION SECTION IN
CHAPTER 3C FOR THE PROCEDURE TO DO THIS.
NOTE THAT THE EXAMPLE DIP SWITCH SHOWN IN FIGURE 2 -10 IS REPRESENTATIVE OF
ONE STYLE OF SWITCH ONLY. DEPENDING ON MANUFACTURER, YOUR DIP SWITCH
STYLE MAY VARY. PLEASE NOTE THE ON/OFF POSITIONS CAREFULLY FOR YOUR UNIT.

2.13.1 Setting tube type (cont)
Figure 2-10: DIP switches on dual speed starter.

2.13.2 Confirming/Changing DSS Starter Type
The low speed and high speed phase shift capacitors for the stator start winding must be matched to the
desired stator type, for example the required high speed phase shift capacitor is 6 uF for “R” type stators
and 7.5 uF for GE Maxiray type stators. Therefore, for example, a dual speed starter configured for an “R”
type stator CANNOT drive a GE Maxiray type stator.
Use the steps in this section to verify that the dual speed starter is compatible with the stator in
the desired tube.
1. Record the part number of the dual speed starter assy in the subject generator. This is printed on
a label near the top of the dual speed starter chassis.
2. Locate that part number in table 2-3, then note the value of the H.S. SHIFT CAPAC and the L.S.
SHIFT CAPAC per the table. Those are the values of the phase shift capacitors in the dual speed
starter. Only tubes requiring those capacitor values may be connected to the dual speed starter.
3. If it is desired to use a different tube from that shown in the compatible X-ray tubes section of the
customer product description form, confirm that the desired tube (housing and insert) is listed in
table 2-3 AND that the required dual speed starter part number for that tube per table 2-3 is the
same as is fitted in your generator.
4. If the preceding steps confirm that the desired tube is fully compatible with the generator, you may
proceed with setting the tube type as per section 2.13.1.
5. If in the preceding steps it is determined that the desired stator IS NOT compatible with the
generator, the phase shift capacitors in the dual speed starter will need to be changed to match
the requirements of the desired tube. Replacement capacitor kits are available to do this as noted
in the next step.
6. Note the required H.S. SHIFT CAPAC and L.S. SHIFT CAPAC values, and the corresponding
dual speed starter part number for the desired tube per table 2-3. Using those capacitor values,
refer to table 2-2. From this table select the required conversion kit to convert to capacitors as
required for the selected tube. The conversion kits are available through the factory/customer
support.
IF MAKING THE ABOVE CONVERSION, PLEASE BE SURE TO CHANGE THE PART
NUMBER IDENTIFIED IN STEP 1 TO THE NEW CONFIGURATION USING AN INDELIBLE
MARKER. THIS WILL ENSURE THAT CONFIGURATION CONTROL OF THE PRODUCT IS
MAINTAINED
TABLE 2-2
HIGH SPD SHIFT CAPAC LOW SPD SHIFT CAPAC CONVERSION KIT P/N
6 uF 31uF 734424-00
7.5 uF 47 uF 734424-01
20 uF 60 uF 734424-02
5 uF 30 uF 734424-03
5 uF 45 uF 734424-04
NOTE: CAPACITOR VALUES SHOWN IN TABLES 2-3 AND 2-4 ARE EQUIVALENT VALUES OF THE
PHASE SHIFT CAPACITORS IN THE DUAL SPEED STARTER. FOR EXAMPLE, THE
STANDARD “R” VERSION OF THE DUAL SPEED STARTER USES TWO 12.5 uF
CAPACITORS CONNECTED IN SERIES TO GIVE NOMINAL 6 uF FOR HIGH SPEED USE.
THIS 6 uF CAPACITANCE IS CONNECTED IN PARALLEL WITH A 25 uF CAPACITOR TO
GIVE 31 uF FOR LOW SPEED USE AS SHOWN IN THE TABLES.

2.13.3 Dual Speed Starter Tube Select Table
All voltages in table 2-3 are at 60/180 Hz unless indicated otherwise.
TABLE 2-3: TUBE TYPES (HIGH SPEED STARTER)

TUBE TYPE TUBE TYPE CODE H.S. H.S. H.S. H.S. BOOST L.S. L.S. H.S. L.S. DUAL SPD
(HOUSING) (INSERT) Switches START RUN BRAKE BRAKE TIME START RUN SHIFT SHIFT STARTER
1........5
VOLTS VOLTS VOLTS TIME VOLTS VOLTS CAPAC CAPAC PART NO.
Comet DO7 DX7 00000 LOW SPEED OPERATION ONLY 1.4 sec 240 50 6 uF 31 uF 733317-01
25/50 Ω stator (See note 1 at end of this table)
Comet DO9 DX9 0.6/2.0 00000 LOW SPEED OPERATION ONLY 1.4 sec 240 50 6 uF 31 uF 733317-01
25/50 Ω stator DX9 1.2/2.0 (See note 1 at end of this table)
Comet DO10 DI104 0.3/0.8 00011 420 80 150 3.0 sec 1.8 sec 240 80 6 uF 31 uF 733317-01
25/50 Ω stator DI104 0.6/1.0
DI104 0.6/1.3
DI104 0.6/1.8
Comet DO10 DI106 0.3/0.8 10011 420 80 150 3.0 sec 2.2 sec 240 80 6 uF 31 uF 733317-01
25/50 Ω stator DI106 0.6/1.0
DI106 0.6/1.3
Comet DI700 0.6/1.0 10011 420 80 150 3.0 sec 2.2 sec 240 80 6 uF 31 uF 733317-01
DO700WX DI700 1.0/1.8
25/50 Ω stator
GE Maxiray 75 1.0/2.0 15° 01110 400 90 80 2.0 sec 0.9 sec 230 70 7.5 uF 47 uF 733317-03
(3” anode) 0.6/1.0 11°
23/23Ω equal Z
stator
GE Maxiray 100 0.3/1.0 11° 00101 400 90 80 3.0 sec 1.0 sec 230 70 7.5 uF 47 uF 733317-03
(4” anode) 0.6/1.0 11°
23/23Ω equal Z 0.6/1.2 11°
stator 0.6/1.5 11°
0.6/1.25 12.5°
1.0/2.0 15°
Gilardoni AR11-30 10101 LOW SPEED OPERATION ONLY 1.4 sec 220 60 6 uF 31 uF 733317-01
Rotagil AR30-60 (See note 1 at end of this table) 50 Hz 50 Hz

2.13.3 Dual Speed Starter Tube Select Table (cont)
1........5
Gilardoni AR20-50 01101 340 60 80 3.0 sec 1.4 sec 220 60 6 uF 31 uF 733317-01
Rotagil AR30-100 150 Hz 150 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz
A/A5 AR40-100
Picker PX1300 PX1302 11100 240 120 100 3.0 sec 2.3 sec 240 50 6 uF 31 uF 733317-01
3” anode PX1312
Std “R stator”
4” anode PX1431
Std “R” stator PX1436
PX1482
4” anode PX1431 * 735925-02
“Q” stator PX1436
PX1482
Philips RO 17/50 00000 LOW SPEED OPERATION ONLY 1.4 sec 240 50 6 uF 31 uF 733317-01
ROT350 SRO 22/50 (See note 1 at end of this table)
ROT351 SRO 33/100
Siemens BI 125/20/40 11101 400 90 80 3.0 1.9 sec HIGH SPEED 5 uF N/A 733317-04
Biangulix 150 Hz 150 Hz OPERATION ONLY
8500 RPM (See note 1 at end of
(configured for this table)
150 Hz
operation)
Siemens 30/52R 00000 400 90 80 3.0 1.9 sec 240 50 5 uF 45 uF 733317-05
Opti-150 20/40
“S” stator
Siemens OptiTop 01011 400 80 120 3.0 sec 1.0 sec 240 80 5 uF 30 uF 733317-06
150/40/80HC-100L * 735925-06
Siemens OptiTop 01011 400 80 120 3.0 sec 1.0 sec 240 80 5 uF 30 uF 733317-06
150/40/80HC-102L * 735925-06

1........5
Varian A102 01000 400 100 100 3.0 sec 1.0 sec 240 60 6 uF 31 uF 733317-01
B100 A132
DX52 A142
Std “R” stator
B100 A132
“P” stator A142
B100 A132 * 735925-02
“Q” stator A142
B130 A272
“P” stator A282
A286
A292
G256
G292
B130 A272
B150 A282
Std “R” stator A286
A292
G256
G292
B130 A272 * 735925-02
B150 A282
“Q” stator A286
A292
G256
G292

1........5
Varian RAD13 00100 400 100 100 3.0 sec 1.2 sec 240 50 6 uF 31 uF 733317-01
Diamond RAD14 0.3/1.2
RAD14 0.6/1.5
Varian RAD 8 00000 LOW SPEED OPERATION ONLY 1.4 sec 240 50 6 uF 31 uF 733317-01
Emerald RAD 68 (See note 1 at end of this table)
Std “R” stator RAD 74
Varian RAD21 10100 400 100 100 3.0 sec 2.3 sec 240 50 6 uF 31 uF 733317-01
Saphire RAD56 0.6/1.0
RAD60
RAD92
RAD94
Varian DX62 A192B 00000 400 100 100 3.0 sec 1.4 sec 240 50 6 uF 31 uF 733317-01
300-400 kHu, A197
A272
A282
A286
A292
Varian DX62U A192B 00000 400 100 100 3.0 sec 1.4 sec 240 50 6 uF 31 uF 733317-01
Universal A197
300-400 kHu, A256
configured as A272
“STD” or “R” A282
stator A286
A292

THE DUAL SPEED STARTER USES MODULATION STRATEGIES TO OBTAIN THE DESIRED OUTPUTS. MEASURED VOLTAGES MAY NOT AGREE
WITH THOSE LISTED IN THE TABLE. HOWEVER, THE CURRENTS FLOWING IN THE STATOR WINDINGS ARE EQUIVALENT TO THOSE THAT WOULD
EXIST IF THE STATOR WAS EXCITED WITH THESE VOLTAGES.
NOTE 1: Tube types designated as low speed only or high speed only must be programmed for low speed only or high speed only operation.
Refer to chapter 3, section 3C.5.1 for details.
* Dual speed starter part numbers 733317-XX are used in 400 VAC 3φ generators and in 480 VAC 3φ generators with a line adjusting transformer.
Dual speed starter part numbers 735925-XX are used in 230 VAC 1φ generators and in 480 VAC 3φ direct input generators (using no line
adjusting transformer).

2.14.0 GENERATOR LOCKOUT SWITCH
A safety lockout switch (S3) is provided on the generator interface board. When this switch is in the
LOCKOUT position, the generator cannot be switched on either from the console or from the adjacent
service switch S2 on the generator interface board. This prevents inadvertent switching on of the
generator while it is being serviced.
S3, the generator lockout switch, must be in the NORMAL position to enable switching the
generator on. Refer to figure 2-11 for these switch locations.
Figure 2-11: Location of lockout switch and local ON/OFF switches

2.15.0 SAFETY INTERLOCKS
It is strongly recommended that the following two interlocks be wired to the generator before preparing to
make any exposures:
DOOR INTERLOCK
The room door interlock switch must be wired to TB4-4 and TB4-5 on the room Interface board. This
switch will provide a closed contact when the door is closed.
X-RAY TUBE THERMAL SWITCH

The X-ray tube(s) thermal switch(s) should be connected to the generator for tube thermal protection.
These may be connected either at the stator terminal blocks (section 2.9.4), or at the room interface
board. The connections on the room interface board are TB4-8 and TB4-9 for tube 1, and TB4-6 and TB4-
7 for tube 2.
2.16.0 CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE
It is recommended that the backup battery voltage be checked before continuing. The normal life
expectancy of these batteries is estimated at 5 years.
CONSOLE CPU BOARD (23 X 56 cm consoles):
1. Turn the operator console upside down carefully to protect the front panel. Remove the 6 screws
securing the base to the molded case.
2. Open the Console carefully such that the interconnecting cables are not strained.
3. Locate the battery on the console CPU board, refer to figure 2-12. Measure the battery voltage
with a DVM. The top of the battery is the positive side; ground (TP2 on the board) is the negative
side.
4. The nominal battery voltage should be approximately 3.0V, replace the battery if it is under 2.80V.
5. Before closing the console, refer to section 2.17.0, console CPU board DIP switch settings.
6. Re-assemble the console. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN THE SCREWS SECURING THE BASE TO
THE MOLDED CONSOLE TOP.
CONSOLE BOARD (31 X 42 cm consoles):
1. Disconnect all connections, including the console ground connection, from the rear of the operator
console.
2. Turn the console upside down carefully to protect the front panel. Remove and temporarily set
aside the jackscrews from the ‘D’ connectors on the rear of the console. Remove and temporarily
set aside the hardware from the console ground stud.
3. Remove the 8 screws securing the base to the molded case.
4. Gently remove the console bottom (the metal bottom panel with the feet attached).
5. Locate the battery on the console board, refer to figure 2-12. Measure the battery voltage with a
DVM. The top of the battery is the positive side; ground (TP2 on the board) is the negative side.

2.16.0 CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE (Cont)
7. Before closing the console, refer to section 2.17.0, console CPU board DIP switch settings.
8. Re-assemble the console in the reverse order of the above. Use of a removable thread locker
(loctite or equivalent) is recommended when reinstalling the jackscrews to prevent them from
loosening if the mating connectors are removed.
Reconnect the console ground and all cables removed in step 1.
GENERATOR CPU BOARD:
1. Locate the battery on the generator CPU board, refer to figure 2-12. Measure the battery voltage
with a DVM. The top of the battery is the positive side, ground (TP21 on the board) is the negative
side.

2.16.0 CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE (cont)
TP 2
CONSOLE CPU BOARD GND
GENERATOR CPU BO ARD
GND
TP 21
TP 2
GND
CONSOLE BOARD
F ILE : IN _C P U B S .C D R
Figure 2-12: Location of batteries on generator and console CPU boards

2.17.0 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
Before continuing, verify the DIP switch settings on the console CPU board and generator CPU board.
These switches have been factory set but may have been readjusted, particularly if this generator is a re-
install.
CONSOLE CPU BOARD (23 X 56 cm console) / CONSOLE BOARD (31 X 42 cm console)
• Verify the settings on SW1, the switches should all be set to OFF. Setting SW1-8 ON at power up
restores factory default settings for the console. SW1-1 to SW1-7 should remain in the OFF position
at all times.
GENERATOR CPU BOARD:
• Verify the settings on SW1. Refer to the table below for the proper settings for this switch.
GENERATOR POWER MAXIMUM mA SW1 -3 SW1-2 SW1-1

30 kW 320 mA ON ON OFF
37.5 kW 400 mA ON OFF ON
50 kW 630 mA OFF ON ON
65 kW 800 mA OFF ON OFF
80 kW 1000 mA OFF OFF ON
SW1-4 OFF > 2 FILAMENT BOARDS ON > I FILAMENT BOARD

SW1-5 OFF > 150 kV MAXIMUM ON > 125 kV MAXIMUM
SW1-6 OFF > DUAL SPEED STARTER ON > LOW SPEED STARTER
SW1-7 OFF > 2 TUBE GENERATOR ON > 1 TUBE GENERATOR
SW1-8 OFF > SET FACTORY DEFAULTS ON > DEFAULTS DISABLED
2.18.0 INITIAL RUN-UP
This section describes the procedure for initial power-on of the generator after it has first been installed.
2.18.1 Initial Voltage Measurements
1. Verify that the mains voltage and current capacity is correct for the generator installation. Refer to
the product ID label on the generator cabinet and chapter 1C of this manual.
2. Temporarily remove the safety cover over the main input fuses in the generator.
3. If the mains supply is compatible with the generator, switch on the main breaker and/or
disconnect switch and check for the following voltages:
NOTE: DO NOT SWITCH ON THE GENERATOR AT THIS TIME (ONLY THE AC MAINS TO THE
GENERATOR IS TO BE SWITCHED ON AT THIS TIME).

2.18.1 Initial Voltage Measurements (Cont)
WARNING: 1. USE EXTREME CARE IN MEASURING THESE VOLTAGES. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT

WITH MAINS VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
2. MAINS VOLTAGE WILL BE PRESENT INSIDE THE GENERATOR CABINET, EVEN WITH
THE CONSOLE SWITCHED OFF.
3. THE BUS CAPACITORS, LOCATED ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD OR ON THE BUS
CAPACITOR ASSEMBLY (SINGLE PHASE UNITS ONLY), PRESENT A SAFETY HAZARD
FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES AFTER THE POWER HAS BEEN REMOVED FROM THE
UNIT. CHECK THAT THESE CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED BEFORE TOUCHING ANY
PARTS.
PLEASE NOTE THAT THE VOLTAGE MEASURED IN STEP 4 WILL NOT NECESSARILY BE THE
SAME AS THE VOLTAGE AT THE MAIN DISCONNECT BOX IN THE ROOM. THE REASON FOR THIS
IS THAT A LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER MAY BE USED WITH THE GENERATOR WHICH
STEPS THE INCOMING LINE VOLTAGE TO THE GENERATOR UP OR DOWN.
GENERATORS WITH NO LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFOMER SHOULD HAVE THE SAME
VOLTAGE IN STEP 4 AS IS SUPPLIED AT THE MAIN DISCONNECT BOX IN THE ROOM. UNITS
WITH A LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER SHOULD HAVE THE FOLLOWING VOLTAGES AT THE
MAIN LINE FUSES IN THE POWER SUPPLY CABINET.
VOLTAGE AT MAIN DISCONNECT BOX VOLTAGE AT MAIN FUSES IN POWER SUPPLY

(LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER INPUT) (LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER OUTPUT)
480 VAC ± 10 % 400 VAC ± 10 %
400 VAC ± 10 % 480 VAC ± 10 %
4. Measure and record the voltage across the main line fuses in the power supply. Single phase
units will only use one set of voltage measurements.
L1 phase to L2 phase = ______ VAC.

5. Are these voltages within specification for the unit as per chapter 1C for generators without a line
adjusting transformer, or within specification per the table above for units with a line adjusting
transformer?
___ Check
6. Switch OFF the mains power to the generator. Verify that there is no voltage present across any
of the mains input phases. Replace the safety cover on the main input fuse block, then switch ON
the mains and generator.
7. Verify that the red LED (DS1) located near the center of the generator interface board is lit.
_____ Check
8. Verify that the red LED (DC BUSS OK) located on the power input board is lit.
_____ Check

2.18.2 Initial Power Up
1. Switch on the generator at the console and observe the startup sequence on the console APR
display.
• MEMORY TEST.... will be displayed

• HIGH FREQUENCY GENERATOR XX KW WILL BE DISPLAYED (XX will be the kW rating
for that model)
• The next screen will show console software revision and power software revision
2. In the generator control cabinet, verify the following:
• On the generator CPU board verify that the following LEDs are ON (these indicate presence
of the DC rails as indicated):
DS38 +5 V
DS41 +15 V
DS43 -15 V
DS45 +12 V
DS46 -12 V
3. In the power supply cabinet, verify the following:
• On the auxiliary board verify that the following LEDs are ON:
CNTCTR CLSD
S.S. OK
+12V
-12V
+/- 35V

2.19.0 PROGRAMMING AND CALIBRATION USING THE CONSOLE
2.19.1 Entering Into Programming/Calibration Mode
This section presents a brief overview of the generator setup menu only. For more detail, refer to chapter
3C.
To enter into the programming and calibration mode for the generator follow the steps below. Refer to
Figure 2-13 for references to APR buttons. This figure shows the APR button layout for the 23 X 56 (cm)
Indico 100 console, and for the 31 X 42 (cm) console.
1 4
3 2
F ILE : IN _L C D .C D R
Figure 2-13: Programming/calibration mode reference
1. Start with the generator switched OFF.
2. While pressing and holding the RESET button [5], press the generator POWER ON button on the
console
3. The generator will go through the start-up sequence, then display the message ENTER
PASSWORD.

2.19.1 Entering Into Programming/Calibration Mode (Cont)
4. Enter the factory default password by pressing the following button sequence: [1] - [2] - [3] - [4].
5. The APR menu will now display the following:
* GENERATOR SETUP *
UTILITY APR EDITOR: DISABLED
GEN CONFIGURATION
DATA LINK
EXIT SETUP
2.19.2 Menu Selections
UTILITY
Allows access to the following functions:
SET TIME & DATE:

Allows setting of: YEAR, MONTH, DAY, HOUR, and MINUTE
ERROR LOG:
Allows review of the generators error log for recorded errors.
STATISTICS:
Allows review of the tube exposure counter(s), the fluoro exposure counter if applicable, and the generator
accumulated exposure counter. Also allows resetting of the tube exposure counter(s), and the fluoro
exposure counter if used.
CONSOLE:
Allows setting the following parameters for the installation: key speed (scroll rate for the displays), speaker
volume, LCD screen mode, and APR mode.
APR EDITOR
This enables or disables technique factor changes. When APR EDITOR is set to ENABLED, the
technique factors may be changed. The new values may then be saved to overwrite the existing values.
Reference chapter 3C for further information.

2.19.2 Menu Selections (Cont)
GEN CONFIGURATION
Allows the service engineer to access the following functions. Further details are in chapter 3C.
• TUBE SELECTION Selects from the available group of X-ray tubes.
• GENERATOR LIMITS Sets the operating limits of the generator.
• RECEPTOR SETUP Allows programming of each image receptor.
• I/O CONFIGURATION Allows setting the inputs and outputs of all image receptors.
• AEC SETUP Defines properties for each channel of the AEC device.
• AEC CALIBRATION Allows calibration of the AEC device.
• FLUORO SETUP Allows setting of the fluoro properties.
• TUBE CALIBRATION Enables the X-ray tube auto calibration feature.
DATA LINK
Used with the CPI GenWare™ utility software. This allows for data communication with a computer in
2 2
order to download additional tube types, transfer APR data, run the A EC  utility, and for other minor
functions. Further documentation is included with the software package in the form of an MS WORD
document (MANUAL.DOC).
A computer (i.e. laptop) and a 9 pin null modem cable with socket connectors (female) on both
ends are required to run this software and interface to the generator.

2.20.0 TUBE AUTO CALIBRATION
Prior to beginning tube auto calibration, the tube(s) used in this installation must be properly selected, and
the generator limits should be programmed. Refer to chapter 3C.
It is recommended that the tube(s) be conditioned (seasoned) before beginning tube auto
calibration, refer to chapter 6.
WARNING: THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES PRODUCE X-RAYS. TAKE ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM X-RADIATION.
CAUTION: ALWAYS VERIFY THE MANUFACTURER OF THE TUBE INSERT. IF THE X-RAY TUBE HAS
BEEN REBUILT, THE TUBE INSERT AND TUBE HOUSING MAY BE FROM DIFFERENT
MANUFACTURERS.
Step Action Result

1. From the GENERATOR SETUP menu The TUBE CALIBRATION menu will display.
(section 2.19.1) select GEN
CONFIGURATION.
2. Select TUBE CALIBRATION. The TUBE AUTO-CAL menu appears.
3. Select the desired tube (tube 1 or tube The selected tube will appear. Selection of the second
2) by pressing the TUBE button. tube is only available on two tube generators.
4. Press FOCAL SPOT to toggle between The selected focal spot displays.
SMALL and LARGE. Start with SMALL.
5. Press and hold the X-RAY button (or The menu will indicate the mA and filament current
use the optional handswitch) to begin while the generator takes a series of exposures.
the calibration procedure.
6. Press RETURN to repeat calibration on
the other focal spot or on the other tube.
7. When auto-calibration is completed, The GEN CONFIGURATION menu will display.
press EXIT to exit the tube auto
calibration menu.
8. Press EXIT to return to the The GENERATOR SETUP menu will display.
GENERATOR SETUP menu.
9. Press EXIT SETUP to exit out of the
setup and calibration mode and return
to the normal operation mode.
NOTE: SHOULD AN ERROR OCCUR DURING AUTO CALIBRATION, AN ERROR MESSAGE WILL
BE DISPLAYED. THE GENERATOR WILL THEN LIMIT THE TUBES OPERATION TO THE
RANGE IN WHICH IT WAS CALIBRATED, THUS ALLOWING FOR PARTIAL OPERATION OF
THE GENERATOR.


CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Calibration 3
CHAPTER 3
SYSTEM INTERFACING, PROGRAMMING,

AND AEC/ABS CALIBRATION
3.0.0 INTRODUCTION
3.1.0 Purpose
This chapter describes the interfacing to the generator of the X-ray room imaging equipment, and
programming of the Millenia and Indico 100 family ofgenerators. This section allows the installer to record
the necessary information to complete the installation as well as to record the programming values. The
installation of the AEC (Automatic Exposure Control) and ABS (Automatic Brightness Stabilization)
devices and their calibration are also covered in this chapter.
This Chapter contains the following sections.
Section Title
3A Setup information.
3B System interfacing
3C Programming the generator
3D Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) calibration
3E Automatic Brightness Stabilization (ABS) calibration
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-03 Rev. A Page 3-1
3 Interfacing and Calibration CPI Canada Inc.
(This page intentionally left blank.)
Page 3-2 Rev. A Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-03
CPI Canada Inc. Setup Information 3A
CHAPTER 3
SECTION 3A
SETUP INFORMATION
CONTENTS:
3A.1.0 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................... 3A-2

3A.2.0 INSTALLATION RECORD ................................................................................................................................ 3A-2
3A.2.1 X-Ray Tubes .................................................................................................................................................. 3A-2
3A.2.2 Mains Supply And Fusing .............................................................................................................................. 3A-3
3A.2.3 Automatic Exposure Control .......................................................................................................................... 3A-3
3A.2.4 Collimator ....................................................................................................................................................... 3A-3
3A.2.5 Image System: ............................................................................................................................................... 3A-3
3A.2.6 ABS Pickup Assembly.................................................................................................................................... 3A-4
3A.2.7 Table Type: .................................................................................................................................................... 3A-4
3A.2.8 Wall Receptor................................................................................................................................................. 3A-4
3A.2.9 Receptor Assignment.................................................................................................................................... 3A-4
3A.3.0 X-RAY TUBE AND GENERATOR PARAMETER WORKSHEET..................................................................... 3A-5
3A.4.0 IMAGE RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING WORKSHEET..................................................................................... 3A-6
3A.5.0 I/O CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET .............................................................................................................. 3A-7
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-04 Rev. A Page 3A-1
3A Setup Information CPI Canada Inc.
3A.1.0 INTRODUCTION
Please record the setup information for your installation in this section before programming the generator. Enter
the information appropriate for your generator model. The data tables will accommodate installations up to a
standard R&F installation with the following: tilting G.I. table with bucky, spot film device, standard image tube
with a medical T.V. system, wall bucky and an overhead tube stand, spot film camera and a digital acquisition
system.
3A.2.0 INSTALLATION RECORD
3A.2.1 X-Ray Tubes
Please enter the appropriate information.
a) Over table X-ray tube (or TUBE # 1)
b) Manufacturer and type:
c) Focal spot combination: large = small =

d) kW of each focal spot: large = small =
e) Maximum kVp:
f) Type of stator:
g) Dual or single speed:
h) Stator delay: sec =
i) Start and run voltage, low speed: start volts = run volts =
j) Start and run voltage, high speed: start volts = run volts =
k) Brake voltage: volts =
l) Maximum filament current: amps =
m) Minimum filament current, stand-by: amps =
n) Thermal switch included:
o) Under table X-ray tube (or TUBE # 2)
p) Manufacturer and type:

q) Focal spot combination: large = small =
r) kW of each focal spot: large = small =
s) Maximum kVp:
t) Type of stator:
u) Dual or single speed:
v) Stator delay: sec =
w) Start and run voltage, low speed: start volts = run volts =
x) Start and run voltage, high speed: start volts = run volts =
y) Brake voltage: volts =
z) Maximum filament current: amps =
aa) Minimum filament current, stand-by: amps =
bb) Thermal switch included:
cc) X-ray tube fan included:
Page 3A-2 Rev. A Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-04
3A.2.2 Mains Supply And Fusing
Please record the following information on the mains voltage and current capacity. Check that the information is
appropriate for the generator according to the nameplate on the generator cabinet.
Line voltage: ________ VAC
Line frequency: 50 Hz. 60 Hz. Line capacity: kVa
Disconnect fuses (main): amps
3A.2.3 Automatic Exposure Control
Chamber Type (optional):
Solid State: __________________ Ion Chamber ______________ PMT _____________
Make: _______________________ Model: _________________
Receptors with AEC (optional):
Table bucky yes Spot film device yes Digital System yes
Wall bucky yes Auxiliary bucky yes
3A.2.4 Collimator
Type: __________________
Compatible with X-ray tube: yes no
Exposure interlock (dry contacts): yes no
Tomo/stereo by-pass: yes no
3A.2.5 Image System
Conventional: ________________________________________ (make and model)

Digital: ______________________________________________(make and model)
Image intensifier: dual mode tri-mode

24 hour supply: __ yes __ no
Image system park/position switch. __ yes __ no
Fluoro foot switch to initiate fluoro and spot exposure: __ yes __ no
Spot film advance delay: greater than 850 mSec. __ yes __ no
Remote Fluoro controller. __ yes __ no
AEC compensation for multi-spot SFD use. __ yes __ no
3A.2.6 ABS Pickup Assembly
Optical diode: _______ PMT: _______ Proportional DC: _______ Composite Video _______
Make: _______________________ Model: _________________
3A.2.7 Table Type
Table type: ______________________________________ Model/Make: _______________________
Grid: ___________ Ratio: __________ L/P Inch: __________ Focus Distance: __________
3A.2.8 Wall Receptor
Type: ______________________________
Grid: ___________ Ratio: __________ L/P Inch: __________ Focus Distance: __________
3A.2.9 Receptor Assignment
Receptor 1: _______________________
Receptor 2: _______________________
Receptor 3: _______________________
Receptor 4: _______________________
Receptor 5: _______________________
Receptor 6: _______________________
3A.3.0 X-RAY TUBE AND GENERATOR PARAMETER WORKSHEET
Note: The information in this table is to be derived from the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
Generator Model: ______________ Serial No: _____________
TUBE SELECTION TUBE 1 TUBE 2

DEFAULT SELECTED DEFAULT SELECTED
TUBE SELECTED
TUBE SPEED
MAX SF KW LS
MAX LF KW LS
MAX SF KW HS
MAX LF KW HS
MAX KV
MAX SF MA
ANODE HU WARNING
ANODE HU LIMIT
SF STANDBY
LF STANDBY
SF MAX
LF MAX
FIL BOOST
FIL PREHEAT
GENERATOR LIMITS DEFAULT SELECTED

MAX KW
MAX MA
MIN MA
MAX MAS
3A.4.0 IMAGE RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING WORKSHEET
IMAGE RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING WORKSHEET DATE:___________ SERIAL #:_____________

FUNCTION RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME
TUBE
TOMO
FLUORO
SERIAL
AEC CHANNEL
INTERFACE
OPTS
RECEPTOR
SYM
FLUORO
HANG
RAD HANG
LAST IMAGE
HOLD
MEMORY
REM TOMO
BUT
SF/LF SWITCH
AEC BACKUP
AEC BACKUP
MAS
AEC BACKUP
MS
3A.5.0 I/O CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET
NOTE: BOXES WITH DOTTED LINES CANNOT HAVE THEIR STATE CHANGED!
FUNCTIONS STANDBY PREP GEN RDY RAD EXP FLUORO EXP
***INPUTS***
REMOTE EXP ----- ----- -----
REMOTE PREP ----- ----- ----- -----
REMOTE FL. EXP ----- ----- ----- -----
CONSOLE EXP ----- ----- -----
CONSOLE PREP ----- ----- ----- -----
TOMO EXP ----- ----- ----- -----
REM. TOMO SEL ----- ----- ----- -----
I/I SAFETY ----- -----
COLL. ITLK ----- -----
BUCKY CONTACTS ----- ----- ----- -----
SPARE -----
THERMAL SW 1 -----
THERMAL SW 2 -----
DOOR ITLK -----
MULTI SPOT EXP ----- ----- ----- -----
***OUTPUTS***
BKY 1 SELECT
BKY 2 SELECT
BKY 3 SELECT
TOMO/BKY 4 SEL
TOMO/BKY STRT
ALE
COLL. BYPASS
ROOM LIGHT
SPARE
CPI Canada Inc. System Interfacing 3B
CHAPTER 3
SECTION 3B
SYSTEM INTERFACING
CONTENTS:
3B.1.0 INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................................................... 3B-2

3B.2.0 LOCATIONS OF INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ................................................................................................. 3B-3
3B.2.1 Generator Pictorial Showing Connections ................................................................................................ 3B-3
3B.2.2 Low Speed/Dual Speed Starter ................................................................................................................ 3B-4
3B.2.3 High Tension Transformer........................................................................................................................ 3B-4
3B.2.4 Generator Interface Board........................................................................................................................ 3B-4
3B.2.5 Generator CPU Board .............................................................................................................................. 3B-4
3B.2.6 AEC Board................................................................................................................................................ 3B-4
3B.2.7 Console CPU Board ................................................................................................................................. 3B-4
3B.2.8 I/0 Expansion Board (optional) ................................................................................................................. 3B-4
3B.2.9 Room Interface Board .............................................................................................................................. 3B-5
3B.3.0 FEATURES OF THE ROOM INTERFACE BOARD .................................................................................... 3B-5
3B.3.1 Inputs ........................................................................................................................................................ 3B-6
3B.3.2 Outputs ..................................................................................................................................................... 3B-7
3B.3.3 Selecting Output Voltages ........................................................................................................................ 3B-7
3B.3.4 Typical Examples ..................................................................................................................................... 3B-9
3B.3.5 Wiring The Room Interface Terminal Plugs............................................................................................ 3B-10
3B.4.0 GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD PROGRAMMING FOR 110/220 VAC ............................................. 3B-11
3B.5.0 TYPICAL R&F ROOM CONNECTIONS .................................................................................................... 3B-12
3B.6.0 TYPICAL ROOM CABLING AND INTERFACING ..................................................................................... 3B-13
Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-05 Rev. E Page 3B-1

3B System Interfacing CPI Canada Inc.
3B.1.0 INTRODUCTION
The Indico 100 generator may be interfaced to various tables, imaging systems, tube stands, tomographic
devices, AEC pickups, Buckys, ABS pickups, X-ray tubes and collimators.
The generator interface may be programmed to supply a voltage, an isolated contact, receive a
voltage, or an external isolated contact.
All interfacing cables enter the generator at the rear of the generator cabinet.
NOTE: The installer must provide the necessary interfacing cables.
WARNING
NOTE: The generator interface board has 110 and 220 VAC present at all times that the main
disconnect is switched ON. Use caution when servicing this board.
Page 3B-2 Rev. E Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-05

3B.2.0 LOCATIONS OF INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
3B.2.1 Generator Pictorial Showing Connections
R O O M IN T E R FA C E B O A R D
Figure 3B-1: Generator to room interface
CAUTION: ENSURE THAT ALL X-RAY TUBE HOUSINGS ARE CONNECTED TO THE GROUND STUD ON
2
THE HT TANK. USE A SEPARATE GROUND WIRE FOR EACH TUBE, #10 AWG (6 mm ) OR
GREATER.

3B.2.2 Low Speed/Dual Speed Starter
Refer to chapter 2 (installation) for instructions on wiring to the low speed or dual speed starter terminal
blocks. Note that the X-ray tube thermal switches may be connected at the starter terminal blocks, or at the
room interface board. Both sets of terminals are connected in parallel, and either may be used.
3B.2.3 High Tension Transformer
Accepts the high tension cables from either one or two x-ray tubes.
3B.2.4 Generator Interface Board
The generator interface board accepts the following (ABS only on R&F generators):
• ABS - composite video (J8).

• ABS - proportional DC (J7).
(Jumpers must be configured for different ABS types, refer to chapter 3E).
• Control console (J4).
3B.2.5 Generator CPU Board
The generator CPU board accepts the following (all are optional):
• Remote fluoro controller (J11).

• RS 232 Port (J1).
• RS 232 Port (J2).
3B.2.6 AEC Board
Depending on the Indico 100 generator’s configuration, different AEC boards may be fitted. Refer to chapter
3D:
3B.2.7 Console CPU Board
The optional hand switch connects to the console CPU board, refer to chapter 2 for details. If it is desired to
connect a remote fluoro footswitch (normally customer supplied), connect to TB6 pins 5 & 6 on the room
interface board, or optionally to terminals “F” and “COM” on TB1 on the console CPU board (23 X 56 cm
consoles), or to pins 7 & 9 of J13 on the 31 X 42 cm console. Refer to chapter 2.
3B.2.8 I/0 Expansion Board (optional)
This optional I/0 board will be used when the Indico 100 generator is interfaced with digital systems, film
changers and various dedicated products. A separate supplement will be included in the manual for this
board, if fitted.

3B.2.9 Room Interface Board
All the necessary inputs and outputs for the external room equipment are located on this board.
• TB1 - Bucky 3 and tomo bucky select, spare input,

• TB2 - Bucky 1 and 2 select, collimator and bucky inputs.
• TB3 - Tomographic inputs and outputs, collimator bypass.
• TB4 - Room light, thermal switches, door interlock, tube indicators.
• TB5 - Multiple spot input, I.I. mag. select.
• TB6 - Remote prep, exposure and fluoro inputs, I.I. safety input, ALE output, spare output.
3B.3.0 FEATURES OF THE ROOM INTERFACE BOARD
Refer to the following schematics and figures.
• Figure 3B-2, room interface board layout.

• Generator interface board schematic, drawing 732175 (sheet 1).
• Room interface board schematic, drawing 733182.
TB 1-TB 6
LIV E C ON TA CT
J W 1-JW 5
LIVE C O N TAC T
24 V DC
24 VD C J W 6-JW 8
110 AC
22 0AC
D RY C O N TAC T D RY C O N TA CT
D RY C O N TA CT
LIVE C O N TAC T
D RY C O N TAC T
Figure 3B-2: Room interface board

3B.3.1 Inputs
• All inputs are opto coupled, select inputs may be configured to use an external +/- 24 VDC source or
may be configured to accept a closed dry contact.
• Note the following inputs and jumper configurations per the table below:
NOTE: The Indico 100 generator is shipped from the factory with all inputs configured for dry
contact inputs.
JUMPER CONFIGURATION (INPUTS):
ROOM INTERFACE BOARD GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD

JUMPER CONFIGURATION
TB1 PINS 4 & 5 (SPARE) JW7 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT
JW7 PINS 2-3 = 24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT
TB2 PINS 6 & 7 (COLLIMATOR) JW9 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT
TB2 PINS 4 & 5 (BUCKY CONTACTS) JW10.PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT
TB3 PINS 6 & 7 (TOMO EXPOSURE) JW3 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT
TB3 PINS 4 & 5 (REMOTE TOMO SELECT) JW2 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT
TB4 PINS 8 & 9 (THERMAL SWITCH 1) DRY CONTACT INPUT ONLY
TB4 PINS 6 & 7 (THERMAL SWITCH 2) DRY CONTACT INPUT ONLY
TB4 PINS 4 & 5 (ROOM DOOR INTLK) DRY CONTACT INPUT ONLY
TB5 PINS 11 & 12 (MULT. SPOT EXPOSURE) JW6 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT
TB6 PINS 9 & 10 (REMOTE EXPOSURE) JW15 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT
TB6 PINS 7 & 8 (REMOTE PREP) JW14 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT
TB6 PINS 3 & 4 (I.I. SAFETY) JW8 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT
TB6 PINS 5 & 6 (REMOTE FLUORO EXP) DRY CONTACT INPUT ONLY

3B.3.2 Outputs
• Outputs are via relay contacts, some of which may be configured to supply a dry contact closure or to
supply 24 VDC, 110 VAC, or 220 VAC upon closure.
• Note the following outputs and jumper configurations per the table below:
• To supply power to a grounded load, use TB1 pin 12 (for example) and jumper on “dry contacts”. This
applies also to TB1 pin 1, TB2 pin 12, TB2 pin 1 and TB3 pin 12.
NOTE: The Indico 100 generator is shipped from the factory with JW1 to JW5 configured for dry
contacts, and JW6 to JW8 configured for 24 VDC output on relay closure.
JUMPER CONFIGURATION (OUTPUTS):
ROOM INTERFACE BOARD ROOM INTERFACE BOARD

JUMPER CONFIGURATION
TB1 PINS 11 & 12 (BUCKY 3 SELECT) JW2 DRY CONTACTS OUTPUT
JW2 LIVE CONTACTS OUTPUT
TB1 PINS 1 & 2 (TOMO BUCKY SELECT) JW1 DRY CONTACTS OUTPUT
TB3 PINS 11 & 12 (TOMO/BUCKY START) JW5 DRY CONTACTS OUTPUT
TB3 PINS 1 & 2 (COLLIMATOR BYPASS) DRY CONTACT OUTPUT ONLY
TB4 PINS 11 & 12 (ROOM LIGHT) DRY CONTACT OUTPUT ONLY
TB4 PINS 1 & 2 TUBE 2 INDICATOR JW6 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = 24VDC OUTPUT
TB4 PINS 1 & 3 TUBE 1 INDICATOR JW6 PINS 2-3 = DRY CONTACT OUTPUT
TB5 PINS 8 & 9 (I.I. MAG 1) DRY CONTACT OUTPUT ONLY
TB6 PINS 1 & 2 (ALE OUTPUT) JW7 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = 24VDC OUTPUT
JW7 PINS 2-3 = DRY CONTACT OUTPUT
TB6 PINS 11 & 12 (SPARE OUTPUT) JW8 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = 24VDC OUTPUT
JW8 PINS 2-3 = DRY CONTACT OUTPUT
3B.3.3 Selecting Output Voltages
Five outputs (K1, K2, K3, K4 and K6 for bucky selects and bucky start) may be jumper configured for a
choice of the following voltages:
• 24 VDC 4 AMPS total.

• 110 VAC 2.5 AMPS total.
• 220 VAC 1.5 AMPS total.
NOTE: 2.5 AMPS IS AVAILABLE AT 110 VAC OR 1.5 AMPS IS AVAILABLE AT 220 VAC, BUT BOTH
ARE NOT AVAILABLE SIMULTANEOUSLY. TOTAL POWER CONSUMPTION MUST NOT
EXCEED 350 VA.

3B.3.3 Selecting Output Voltages (Cont)
The above voltage sources are not compatible with:
• Collimator lamps (24 VDC 150 watts). These exceed the 4 Amp rating of the 24 VDC supply.
• Fluorescent lamps. These have high starting currents and generate transients when the tube strikes.
• Some inductive loads may cause difficulties (for example some motors, under table tube fans, and
solenoids).
IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT CLAMPING / RECOVERY DIODES BE USED ON INDUCTIVE

DEVICES SUCH AS RELAYS ETC WHICH ARE CONNECTED TO THE ROOM INTERFACE BOARD.
Voltage selections are made by adding jumper wires from TB11 to TB8, TB9, or TB10, and placing the
jumpers on JW1, JW2, JW3, JW4, or JW5 in the live contact position.
Review figure 3B-3 for typical examples.
5 4 3 2 1
K2 K1 K4 K3 K6
FIL E: IN _R M JM P.CDR
Figure 3B-3: Typical jumper arrangement on the room interface board
SOME INSTALLATIONS REQUIRE THAT THE OUTPUTS OF RELAYS K1, K2, K3, K4, K6 OR K8 DRIVE
THE INPUTS OF OPTO COUPLERS. IN INSTALLATIONS WHERE THESE RELAYS SOURCE 110 OR 220
VAC, THE LEAKAGE CURRENT THROUGH THE R-C SNUBBER ACROSS THE RELAY CONTACTS MAY
BE SUFFICIENT TO ENERGIZE THE OPTO COUPLERS WHEN THE RELAYS ARE OPEN.
IF THIS IS EXPERIENCED, THE R-C SNUBBER SHOULD BE DISCONNECTED FROM THE
CIRCUIT. CUTTING AND REMOVING THE JUMPER WIRES PER THE TABLE ON THE NEXT PAGE WILL
DISABLE THE R-C SNUBBER CIRCUIT. THE JUMPER WIRES SHOULD BE CUT AS NEAR AS
POSSIBLE TO THE PADS ON THE BOARD, THEN AS MUCH AS IS POSSIBLE OF THE WIRE JUMPER
SHOULD BE REMOVED. THIS IS NECESSARY TO WITHSTAND THE OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
ACROSS THE RELAY CONTACTS.

3B.3.3 Selecting Output Voltages (Cont)
IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE INSTALLER TO PROVIDE THE PROPER INTERFACING CIRCUITS TO THE
OPTO COUPLER(S) IN THESE TYPES OF INSTALLATIONS.
For reference, the jumper wire links associated with each of the subject relays is listed below:
RELAY JUMPER WIRE
K1 JW12
K2 JW9
K3 JW11
K4 JW10
K6 JW14
K8 JW13
3B.3.4 Typical Examples
Selected Output Relay Plug and Jumper Wire Jumper
K2 (24 VDC) JW2: Live Contact (K2) TB11 - 5 to TB8

K1 (110 VAC) JW1: Live Contact (K1) TB11 - 4 to TB9
K4 (24 VDC) JW4: Live Contact (K4) TB11 - 3 to TB8
K3 (220 VAC) JW3: Live Contact (K3) TB11 - 2 to TB10
K6 (dry contacts) JW5: Dry Contact (K6) TB11 - no connection
K12 (24 VDC) JW7: Live Contact 24VDC N/A
K13 (dry contacts) JW8: Dry Contact N/A
K7 (24 VDC) JW6: Live Contact 24VDC N/A
The previous examples will configure the outputs as shown below:
• K2 when selected will provide 24 VDC to a load at TB1 pins 11 and 12.
• K1 when selected will supply 110 VAC to a load at TB1 pins 1 and 2.
• K4 when selected will supply 24 VDC to a load at TB2 pins 11 and 12.
• K3 when selected will supply 220 VAC to a load at TB2 pins 1 and 2.
• K6 when selected will supply closed contacts at TB3 pins 11 and 12.
• K12 when selected will supply 24 VDC at TB6 pins 1 and 2.
• K13 when selected will supply closed contacts at TB6 pins 11 and 12.
• K7 will supply 24 VDC at TB4 pin 3 for tube 1, or 24 VDC at TB4 pin 2 for tube 2. Ground
reference will be at TB4 pin 1.

3B.3.5 Wiring The Room Interface Terminal Plugs
Figure 3B-4: Terminal plug
• Remove the required mating connectors from TB1 to TB6 on the room interface board.
• Back out the wire retaining screws as required.
• Dress the interface cable with a minimum of 5 inch (130 mm) flying leads.
• Strip each wire .25 inches (6 mm).
• Insert the wire into the plug and tighten the terminal screw. Several wires may be inserted into a
single terminal connection.
• Be sure the plug numbering matches the input/output signals.
• Insert the plug into the room interface plug as shown in Figure 3B-4.
• Leave sufficient cable to allow interface access.
• To eliminate confusion, label each plug.
• Cover plates are located on the rear access panels to provide strain relief for the interface cables.
Holes are provided on the shelf at the back of the cabinet, below the room interface board, for
attaching additional strain relief hardware such as “C” or “P” clamps as desired by the installer.

3B.4.0 GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD PROGRAMMING FOR 110/220 VAC
The 110/220 VAC supplies available at TB9 and TB10 of the room interface board may be programmed
such that:
• 110/220 VAC is present at TB9 and TB10 at all times that the generator main disconnect is switched
ON.
• 110/220 VAC is present at TB9 and TB10 only when the generator itself is switched ON.
The desired selection is made using JW1 on the generator interface board. Setting the jumper to JW1 pins
1-2 selects the condition where 110/220 VAC is present at TB9 and TB10 only when the generator is
switched ON.
Setting the jumper to JW1 pins 2-3 selects 110/220 VAC to be present at TB9 and TB10 at all times
that the generator main disconnect is switched ON.
Refer to figure 3B-5, this shows the jumper position JW1 pins 1-2 which only provides for 110/220 VAC
when the generator is switched ON.
Figure 3B-5: 110/220 VAC programming

3B.5.0 TYPICAL R&F ROOM CONNECTIONS
R O O M IN T ER FAC E B O A R D
Figure 3B-6: Typical R&F room

3B.6.0 TYPICAL ROOM CABLING AND INTERFACING
The following is for reference only and represents a typical R&F procedure room.
• Cable assembly #1
1. Bucky 3 select (image receptor).
2. Spare input, may be programmed for an auxiliary input.
3. Tomo bucky select, usually used to select a tomographic device.
1. Bucky 1 select (image receptor), usually used to select the R&F table bucky.
2. Collimator interlock, will prevent an exposure if the collimator inputs are not satisfied.
3. Bucky contacts, all bucky contacts are paralleled at this connector. Diode isolation may
be required.
4. Bucky 2 select (image receptor), usually used to select vertical wall bucky.
1. Collimator bypass. Usually used with the collimator associated with the tomographic
device, to allow non-PBL operation in the tomographic mode.
2. Remote tomo select, used for selecting tomography operation from a remote R&F table.
3. Tomo start, will issue a start to sweep signal to a tomographic device.
4. Tomographic exposure, the generator waits for a switch closure during the tomographic
sweep.
1. Room light. Provides a closed contact to energize the X-ray room warning light.
Maximum 250 watts.
2. Door interlock. Requires a closed dry contact to interlock the generator exposure with
the X-ray room’s entrance door.
3. Tube select indicator (source select indicator). Indicates which X-ray tube has been
selected.
4. Optional thermal switch inputs.
1. Mag. select. Interfaces with the image intensifier to select the magnification modes.
2. Multiple-spot exposure. When multi-spot operation is selected at the spot film device,
(example: 4 on 1) and this input receives a closed dry contact, the AEC calibration will
be offset to compensate for the small fields.
1. Interfaces to the table (conventional or remote R&F), the X-ray prep, expose and fluoro
footswitch.
2. The I.I. safety position interlock switch, used if the I.I. may be removed from the spot film
device.
3. ALE - required if an SFC or a serial changer is used.
4. Spare output.

3B.6.0 TYPICAL ROOM CABLING AND INTERFACING (CONT)
2
1. Must be a #10 AWG (6 mm ) wire or greater, connected from the housing of both X-ray
tubes to ground at the high tension transformer.
• Cable assemblies #8
1. Pair of H.T. cables from the over table (tube-1) X-ray tube to the HT Transformer.
2. Pair of H.T. cables from the under table (tube-2) X-ray tube to the HT transformer.
• Cable assembly #9.

1. Interfaces the ABS signal from the TV camera as either DC proportional or composite
video.
2. Interfaces the PMT’s high voltage and signal to the generator, if used.
Refer to chapter 3E for details.

1. These cables are usually supplied by the AEC vendor. Be sure these cables are placed
away from any electrical noise areas. When interfacing AEC cables be careful not to
cause ground loops. Grounding should only be at the AEC board.
Refer to chapter 3D for details.

1. This cable is supplied by CPI for the remote fluoro controller interface.

1. This cable is supplied by CPI for the control console interface.

1. Supplied with the optional laptop computer interconnect box.

1. AC mains cable.

1. Cable(s) for digital imaging system.

CPI Canada Inc. Programming the Generator 3C
CHAPTER 3
SECTION 3C
PROGRAMMING THE GENERATOR
CONTENTS:
3C.1.0 INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................................................3C-2
3C.1.1 Entering Into Programming Mode ..........................................................................................................3C-2
3C.2.0 GENERATOR SETUP MENU ...................................................................................................................3C-3
3C.3.0 UTILITY MENU .........................................................................................................................................3C-3
3C.3.1 Setting Time And Date...........................................................................................................................3C-4
3C.3.2 Error Log................................................................................................................................................3C-4
3C.3.3 Statistics ................................................................................................................................................3C-5
3C.3.4 Console..................................................................................................................................................3C-5
3C.4.0 APR EDITOR ............................................................................................................................................3C-6
3C.5.0 GENERATOR CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................3C-7
3C.5.1 Tube Selection .......................................................................................................................................3C-7
3C.5.2 Generator Limits ..................................................................................................................................3C-11
3C.5.3 Receptor Setup....................................................................................................................................3C-12
3C.5.4 I/O Configuration..................................................................................................................................3C-16
3C.5.5 AEC Setup ...........................................................................................................................................3C-19
3C.5.6 AEC Calibration ...................................................................................................................................3C-19
3C.5.7 Fluoro Setup ........................................................................................................................................3C-20
3C.5.8 Tube Calibration...................................................................................................................................3C-20
3C.6.0 DATA LINK..............................................................................................................................................3C-20
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-05 Rev. B Page 3C-1
3C Programming the Generator CPI Canada Inc.
3C.1.0 INTRODUCTION
Programming of the generator is performed using the operator control console. All programming menus
are displayed in the LCD display window on the console. The ten “soft key” buttons (1 to 10 in the figure
below) are used to navigate through the programming screens and to select and enter values in this
section.
In this section, SELECT means to press the button adjacent to the desired function shown in the
LCD display window
3C.1.1 Entering Into Programming Mode
To enter into the programming mode for the generator follow the steps below. Refer to figure 3C-1 for the
button locations referenced in this section. This figure depicts both the 23 X 56 (cm) console, and the 31 X
42 (cm) console.
1 5
2 6
3 7
4 8
9 10
RESET
Figure 3C-1: Programming/calibration mode reference
Step Action Result

1. Start with the generator switched OFF.
2. While pressing and holding the RESET The generator will go through its start-up
button, press the generator POWER ON sequence, then display the message
button on the console. ENTER PASSWORD.
3. Enter the password by pressing the button The GENERATOR SETUP menu will now
sequence: [1] - [8] - [4] - [5]. be displayed as shown in the next
section.
Page 3C-2 Rev. B Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-05
3C.2.0 GENERATOR SETUP MENU
The GENERATOR SETUP menu presents the user with 5 main options.
* GENERATOR SETUP *
UTILITY APR EDITOR: ENABLED
GEN CONFIGURATION
DATA LINK
EXIT SETUP
The table below shows the functions available within each of the options in the GENERATOR SETUP
menu. Select one of these options to access the corresponding function.
UTILITY • Set time & date
• Error log
• Statistics
• Console
APR EDITOR • Enables/disables changes to APR
techniques
GEN CONFIGURATION • Tube selection
• Generator limits
• Receptor setup
• I/O configuration
• AEC setup
• AEC calibration
• Fluoro setup
• Tube calibration
DATA LINK • Download/upload software via a laptop
computer
EXIT SETUP • Returns to normal operating mode (non
setup/programming mode)
3C.3.0 UTILITY MENU
The UTILITY menu presents the user with 5 options as shown below.
* UTILITY *
SET TIME & DATE
ERROR LOG
STATISTICS
CONSOLE
EXIT
3C.3.1 Setting Time And Date
The SET TIME & DATE menu allows changing or setting of the time and date.
* SET TIME & DATE *
YEAR: 2000 HOUR: 18
MONTH: 9 MIN: 29
DAY: 15 +
-
EXIT
Use these steps to set the time and date.

Step Action
1. From the UTILITY menu, select SET TIME & DATE.
2. Select YEAR and press the + or - buttons to set the year.
3. Select MONTH and press the + or - buttons to set the month.
4. Select DAY and press the + or - buttons to set the date.
5. Select HOUR and press the + or - buttons to set the hour (in 24 hour format).
6. Select MIN and press the + or - buttons to set the minutes.
7. Select EXIT to return to the UTILITY menu.
3C.3.2 Error Log
The ERROR LOG menu allows the display of error messages stored in the generator’s error log.
Parameters such as kV, mA, time, receptor, focus, tech selection, field, film screen and fluoro
parameters will be displayed simultaneously on the console LED displays.
* ERROR LOG *
ERROR # 1 OF 18
DATE: 8-19-2000 TIME: 13:09
ERROR CODE: 200 +
ERROR MESSAGE: ANODE HEAT WARN -
EXIT
Use these steps to access the error log.

Step Action Result
1. From the UTILITY menu select ERROR
LOG.
2. Select ERROR # and press the + or - The error code, error message, date and
buttons to scroll through the error log. time of the error will be displayed in the
LCD window, and the associated
parameters will be displayed on the
console displays.
3. Select EXIT to return to the UTILITY
menu.
3C.3.3 Statistics
The STATISTICS menu shows the tube exposure count, accumulated fluoro hours if applicable, and
the accumulated generator exposure count. This also allows resetting of select counters.
* STATISTICS *
TUBE 1 EXP: 500 RESET TUBE 1 EXP
TUBE 2 EXP: 600 RESET TUBE 2 EXP
FLUORO HOURS: 100 RESET FLUORO HOURS
TOTAL EXP: 1100
EXIT
Use these steps to access the statistics menu. RAD only or 1 tube generators will show a subset of
the above menu items.
Step Action
1. From the UTILITY menu select STATISTICS.
2. To reset the tube exposure counter, select RESET TUBE 1 EXP or RESET TUBE 2
EXP. Select RESET FLUORO HOURS to reset the fluoro exposure counter.
3C.3.4 Console
The CONSOLE menu allows setting of the items below to suit operator preferences:
* CONSOLE *
SLOW KEY REPEAT: 200MS LCD SCREEN
MED. KEY REPEAT: 150MS APR MODE: NO
FAST KEY REPEAT: 75MS +
SPEAKER VOLUME: 15 -
EXIT
Definitions of console parameters as used in this section.

• SLOW KEY REPEAT Determines the speed at which displays change while the
selected key is pressed for the first 5 counts.
• MED. KEY REPEAT Determines the speed at which displays change while the
selected key is pressed for the next 5 counts.
• FAST KEY REPEAT Determines the speed at which displays change while the
selected key is pressed after 10 counts.
• SPEAKER VOLUME: Sets the speaker volume for the control console in the range 1
to 15.
• LCD SCREEN Toggles between normal and reverse video for the LCD
display.
• APR MODE: NO allows the operator to select an APR view, while still having
the ability to use the TECH SELECT button to manually select
AEC, mAs or mA/ms.
YES only allows the operator to use the preprogrammed
technique selections for APR.
3C.3.4 Console (cont)
Use these steps to access the CONSOLE menu.

Step Action
1. From the UTILITY menu select CONSOLE.
2. Select the desired parameter to change. SLOW, MED, FAST KEY REPEAT and
SPEAKER VOLUME are adjusted by pressing the + or - buttons. LCD SCREEN
and APR MODE are toggled by pressing the adjacent selection button.
4. Select EXIT again to return to the GENERATOR SETUP menu.
3C.4.0 APR EDITOR
The APR EDITOR enables/disables the ability of the operator to make and then save changes to APR
techniques.
* GENERATOR SETUP *
GEN CONFIGURATION
DATA LINK
EXIT SETUP
Two modes of operation are available for the APR EDITOR:

• ENABLED Allows the operator to change the default APR technique(s),
and then save the changes to memory. The APR will
subsequently default to the changed technique.
• DISABLED Allows temporary editing of APR technique(s), but does not
allow the changes to be saved to memory. The APR will always
default to the original technique when the generator is switched
OFF and then ON again.
GENERATORS WITH CPU BOARD 732174: When the generator is switched OFF and then
ON again, the APR editor will default to the DISABLED state. Further APR changes will
require that the APR editor be reset to ENABLED to allow APR techniques to be changed
and then saved.
GENERATORS WITH CPU BOARD 734573: The generator stores the last APR editor setting
prior to being switched OFF. If the APR editor was previously ENABLED, APR changes
may subsequently be made and then saved in normal operating mode without the need to
manually set the APR editor to ENABLED. To disable APR technique changes, the APR
editor must be set to DISABLED.
Use these steps to set the APR EDITOR.

Step Action
1. From the GENERATOR SETUP menu select APR EDITOR.
2. Press the APR EDITOR button again to toggle to the desired selection.
3C.4.0 APR EDITOR (cont)
NOTE: APR TEXT MAY BE ALTERED BY USING A COMPUTER RUNNING THE CPI GenWare
UTILITY SOFTWARE. FURTHER DOCUMENTATION REGARDING THIS FUNCTION IS
INCLUDED WITH THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE IN THE FORM OF AN MS WORD DOCUMENT.
3C.5.0 GENERATOR CONFIGURATION
The GEN CONFIGURATION menu presents the user with 9 options as shown below. Select one of these
options to access the corresponding menu.
* GEN CONFIGURATION *
TUBE SELECTION AEC SETUP
GENERATOR LIMITS AEC CALIBRATION
RECEPTOR SETUP FLUORO SETUP
I/O CONFIGURATION TUBE CALIBRATION
EXIT
3C.5.1 Tube Selection
The TUBE SELECTION menus allow the desired tube type to be selected and assigned to TUBE 1 and to
TUBE 2 (two tube generators only), and allow setting of the default limits for that tube.
This menu will not be displayed on one-tube generators.

*TUBE SELECTION *
TUBE 1
TUBE 2
EXIT
The next three menus display the default tube selections. Selections may not be
exactly as shown.
* TUBE 1 SELECTION *
A192B 0.6/1.2 G256 0.6/1.0
A256 0.6/1.0 G292 0.6/1.2
A292 0.6/1.2 G1082 0.3/1.0
A272 0.3/0.6 RAD8 1.0/2.0
RETURN >>
RAD14 0.6/1.2 RAD74 0.6/1.5
RAD21 0.6/1.2 RAD92 0.6/1.2
RAD56 0.6/1.2 DX10HS 0.6/1.0
RAD60 0.6/1.2 DX92HS 0.6/1.2
<< >>
3C.5.1 Tube Selection (cont)
DX93HS 0.6/1.5 RO1750 0.6/1.3
DX101HS 0.6/1.3
MX75 1.0/2.0
MX100 0.6/1.25
<< >>
This menu is only available if additional tubes have been downloaded via a computer running CPI
GenWare software.
***USER DOWNLOADED TUBES DISPLAYED HERE**
<< RETURN
Use these steps to access the TUBE SELECTION menus.

Step Action Result
1. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu
select TUBE SELECTION.
2. Select TUBE 1 or TUBE 2. This step not The available tubes to choose from will
available on one tube generators, go display.
directly to step 3.
3. Select the X-ray tube type to be assigned This will assign the selected X-ray tube to
to that tube location. Use the >> and << the desired tube location.
buttons to navigate through the tube
selection menus if your desired tube is not
displayed on the current screen.
4. Once the desired tube has been selected, See next page for further details. Do not
parameters for that tube are displayed press RETURN or >> until this is
showing the default values. DO NOT requested in a later step.
adjust the default values at this time.
5. Additional tube types may be downloaded
using the CPI GenWare utility software.
Refer to section 3C.6.0 DATA LINK.
When the desired tube is selected, the default limits are displayed. Please consult the X-ray tube data
sheet(s) before making any changes.
The dual speed starter operates at 60 or 180 Hz (50 or 150 Hz for some tube types) independent
of line frequency. The low speed starter operates at 50 Hz for 50 Hz mains, or 60 Hz for 60 Hz mains.
Therefore for generators equipped with the low speed starter, the 60 Hz tube ratings are automatically
derated for 50 Hz operation if required.
PLEASE DO NOT CHANGE ANY DEFAULTS UNLESS THE IMPACT OF THOSE CHANGES IS
CLEARLY UNDERSTOOD. INITIAL CALIBRATION SHOULD BE PERFORMED USING THE DEFAULT
VALUES.
NOTE: BEFORE CHANGING X-RAY TUBE DEFAULT PARAMETERS, PLEASE FILL

IN THE X-RAY TUBE AND GENERATOR PARAMETER WORKSHEET. A
BLANK FORM THAT SHOULD BE PHOTOCOPIED IS LOCATED IN SECTION
3A 3.0. THIS ALLOWS RECORDING OF THE DEFAULT VALUES AND THE
NEW (CHANGED) VALUES.
The next three menus show the default tube limits. These menus appear after a tube has been selected in
the previous steps.
*TUBE 1: RAD60 0.6/1.2 12º REV 1.4*
TUBE SPEED: DUAL MAX SF KW HS: 35.2
MAX SF KW LS: 21.3 MAX LF KW HS: 99.0
MAX LF KW LS: 58.9 +
MAX KV: 150 -
RETURN >>
*TUBE 1: RAD60 0.6/1.2 12º REV 1.4*

MAX SF MA: 320
ANODE HU WARNING: 80%
ANODE HU LIMIT: 90% +
-
<< >>
*TUBE 1: RAD60 0.6/1.2 12º REV 1.4*

SF STANDBY: 2.5A FIL BOOST: 200MS
LF STANDBY: 2.5A FIL PREHEAT: 800MS
SF MAX: 5.2A +
LF MAX: 5.5A -
<< RETURN
Definitions of tube defaults as used in this section.

• TUBE SPEED May be altered on dual speed generators. DUAL means that
the generator determines whether to use low speed or high
speed operation.
• MAX SF KW LS Sets the maximum small focus low speed kW limit.
• MAX LF KW LS Sets the maximum large focus low speed kW limit.
• MAX KV: Sets the maximum kV allowed for that tube.
• MAX SF KW HS Sets the maximum small focus high speed kW limit.
• MAX LF KW HS: Sets the maximum large focus high speed kW limit.
• MAX SF MA Sets the maximum mA in small focus. This should be set as

low as possible to preserve the focal spot track wear and focal
spot blooming.
• ANODE HU WARNING Sets the limit at which the anode heat warning message is
displayed.
• ANODE HU LIMIT Sets the limit at which exposures will be inhibited. If the present
anode heating is under the threshold, the exposure will be
inhibited if the next exposure is calculated to exceed the anode
HU limit.
• SF STANDBY Sets the small focus standby filament current. The required
value should be obtained from the X-ray tube data sheets.
• LF STANDBY As above but for large focus.
• SF MAX Sets the small focus maximum filament current.
• LF MAX As above but for large focus.
• FIL BOOST Sets the filament rapid boost duration in order to quickly raise
the filament temperature. In installations where a spot film or
equivalent device is used, default boost and preheat values
may be decreased if needed to allow for one second R/F
change over time.
• FIL PREHEAT The time that the filament is held at the required emission level
before an exposure is permitted
Typically, the boost time should be between 200 and 250 msec, and the preheat time should be in the
range of 700 - 800 ms.
If in doubt, monitor the filament feedback and be sure the filament is not being over or under driven during
an exposure.
Standby current must be below the emission point. If the standby current is too high, the lower
fluoro mA may not calibrate properly resulting in a high mA fault error during fluoro operation.
If the maximum filament current is increased, be careful not to exceed the tube manufacturer’s
specifications.
Use these steps to modify the tube defaults.

Step Action
1. Use the >>, <<, and RETURN buttons to navigate through the TUBE
DEFAULTS screens.
2. Select the appropriate default value to change. Refer to the definitions on the
previous page.
3. Use the + and - buttons to change the selected values. Pressing the TUBE
SPEED button toggles the selection between LOW, HIGH and DUAL speed
(generators with dual speed starter only).
4. When finished altering the tube default values, press the <<, RETURN or EXIT
button(s) as required to return to the TUBE SELECTION menu (two tube
generators) or GEN CONFIGURATION menu (one tube generators).
5. Select the second X-ray tube if desired by repeating the previous steps (two
tube generators only).
PLEASE ENSURE THAT THE SELECTED X-RAY TUBE STATOR(S) ARE COMPATIBLE
WITH THE LOW SPEED OR DUAL SPEED STARTER IN YOUR GENERATOR.
6. Select EXIT to return to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu (two tube
generators only).
3C.5.2 Generator Limits
The GENERATOR LIMITS menu allows the setting of generator limits as defined below.
* GENERATOR LIMITS*
MAX KW: 80
MAX MA: 1000
MIN MA: 10 +
MAX MAS 630 -
EXIT
Definitions of generator limits as used in this section.

• MAX KW Sets the maximum generator kW limit.
• MAX MA Sets the maximum generator mA limit.
• MIN MA Sets the minimum generator mA limit.
• MAX MAS Sets the maximum generator mAs limit.
BEFORE MAKING ANY CHANGES IN THIS SECTION, PLEASE CONSULT THE X-RAY TUBE DATA
SHEETS TO ENSURE THAT THE PROPOSED CHANGES DO NOT EXCEED THE MANUFACTURERS
RECOMMENDED LIMITS.
NOTE: BEFORE CHANGING GENERATOR LIMITS, PLEASE FILL IN THE X-RAY

TUBE AND GENERATOR PARAMETER WORKSHEET. A BLANK FORM
THAT SHOULD BE PHOTOCOPIED IS LOCATED IN SECTION 3A 3.0. THIS
ALLOWS RECORDING OF THE DEFAULT VALUES AND THE NEW
(CHANGED) VALUES.
Use these steps to set the generator limits.

Step Action
1. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu select GENERATOR LIMITS.
2. Select a limit to be changed. Refer to the previous definitions.
3. Use the + and - buttons to change the selected values.
4. When finished altering the generator default values, press EXIT to return to the
GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
3C.5.3 Receptor Setup
The RECEPTOR SETUP menus allow each of the image receptors to be programmed as defined in the
table following the example menu screens.
* RECEPTOR SETUP [sym] *

TUBE: 1 AEC CHANNEL: 1
TOMO: NO INTERFACE OPTS: 0
FLUORO: NO +
SERIAL: NO -
EXIT >>
* RECEPTOR SETUP [sym]*

RECEPTOR SYM: [sym] MEMORY: DEF
FLUORO HANG: 30 SEC REM TOMO BUT: 2000 MS
RAD HANG: 0 SEC +
LAST IMAGE HOLD: 40 MS -
<< >>
* RECEPTOR SETUP [sym]*

SF/LF SWITCH: MAN DEFAULTS
AEC BACKUP: FIXED
AEC BACKUP MAS: 500 +
AEC BACKUP MS: 3200 -
<<
THE DEFAULTS SELECTION IN THE MENU ABOVE IS ONLY AVAILABLE IF MEMORY IN MENU 2
WAS SET TO DEF.
RECEPTOR MENUS 4 AND 5 BELOW ARE ONLY ACCESSIBLE IF DEFAULTS IS ENABLED.
* RECEPTOR SETUP [sym] DEFAULTS*

TECHNIQUE: AEC LEFT FIELD: YES
FOCUS: SMALL CENTER FIELD: YES
FILM SCREEN: 1 RIGHT FIELD: YES
<< >>
* RECEPTOR SETUP [sym] DEFAULTS*

KV: 75 DENSITY: 0
MA: 320
MS: 50 +
-
<<
3C.5.3 Receptor Setup (cont)
Definitions of receptor setup programming as used in this section follow. The selections made
when programming a receptor apply to that receptor only.
• TUBE Selects the tube assigned to that receptor. Selecting NONE
disables that receptor.
• TOMO Enables or disables tomographic operation (NO is disabled).
• FLUORO Enables or disables fluoroscopic operation (NO is disabled).
• SERIAL Allows repeated (serial) X-ray exposures without the need to re-
prep after each exposure. Normally used with serial film
changers (NO is disabled).
• AEC CHANNEL Defines which AEC channel will be used by the receptor. This
must be set to a valid channel or 0 as noted below. For example
if using an AEC board with only 3 input channels (channels 1 to
3) then selecting AEC channel 4 will cause an error. Selecting 0
disables AEC operation on that receptor.
• INTERFACE OPTS Selects pre-defined interface options:
0 = None
1 = InfiMed digital
2 = ATS ESI digital
3 = Gilardoni digital pulsed RAD
4 = Gilardoni digital HCF
5 = Not assigned at this time
• RECEPTOR SYM Allows one of six receptor symbols [sym] to be associated with
the selected receptor. Symbol 7 is blank and may be used for
an auxiliary device.
• FLUORO HANG Sets the time that the rotor will continue spinning after a fluoro
exposure has terminated.
• RAD HANG Sets the time that the rotor will continue spinning after a rad
exposure has terminated.
• LAST IMAGE HOLD Sets the time that the exposure will continue after the fluoro
footswitch has been released. This enables a frame store
device to complete the last image.
• MEMORY Defines the techniques that will be defaulted to when a receptor
is selected:
YES: The selected receptor will remember it’s last techniques
such that those techniques are displayed when that receptor is
re-selected.
NO: The selected receptor will not remember the last
techniques used on that receptor. The techniques used will be
the same as last used on the previous receptor.
DEF: The techniques used for that receptor will be as
programmed. See receptor setup menu 4 and 5
• REM TOMO BUT Sets the default tomo backup time when tomo is selected via the
REMOTE TOMO SELECT input.
• SF/LF SWITCH AUTO: Small or large focus will automatically be selected by the
generator depending on the tube current.
MAN: The operator must manually select small/large focus.
• AEC BACKUP Defines the AEC backup mode to be used:
FIXED: The generator will determine the maximum AEC backup
time, not to exceed preset AEC backup mAs/ms values or
system limits. The characters AEC will be displayed in the time
window of the LED display during AEC operation.
MAS: Allows the operator to adjust the AEC backup mAs, not to
exceed preset AEC backup mAs/ms values or system limits.
The mAs value will be displayed in the time window of the LED
display during AEC operation.
MS: Allows the operator to adjust the AEC backup ms, not to
exceed preset AEC backup mAs/ms values or system limits.
The ms value will be displayed in the time window of the LED
display during AEC operation.
• AEC BACKUP MAS Sets the maximum backup mAs, to a limit of 500 mAs (600 mAs
for some generator models).
• AEC BACKUP MS Sets the maximum back-up ms.
• DEFAULTS This selection is available only if MEMORY was set to DEF in
RECEPTOR SETUP menu 2.
THE FOLLOWING SELECTIONS ARE ONLY AVAILABLE IF DEFAULTS WAS ENABLED AS
PREVIOUSLY DESCRIBED.
• TECHNIQUE Defines which technique will be defaulted to when a receptor is

selected. Options are AEC, MA, MAS.
• FOCUS Defines which focus will be defaulted to when a receptor is
selected. Options are LARGE or SMALL.
• FILM SCREEN Defines which film screen will be defaulted to when a receptor is
selected and AEC enabled. Options are film screen 1, 2, or 3.
• LEFT FIELD Selects the left field on the AEC device when AEC is selected.
• CENTER FIELD As above, but for center field.
• RIGHT FIELD As above, but for right field.
• KV Selects the default kV value.
• MA Selects the default mA value.
• MS Selects the default time value.
• DENSITY Selects the default density value.
NOTE: IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE IMAGE RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING

WORKSHEET BE FILLED IN FOR EACH RECEPTOR THAT IS
PROGRAMMED. A BLANK FORM THAT SHOULD BE PHOTOCOPIED IS
LOCATED IN SECTION 3A 4.0. THIS WILL PROVIDE A RECORD OF THE
RECEPTOR SETUP FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
If the image receptor defaults are changed, please record the original defaults in a copy of the table below:
IMAGE RECEPTOR DEFAULT SETTINGS

FUNCTION RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6
TECHNIQUE
FOCUS
FILM SCREEN
LEFT FIELD
CENTER FIELD
RIGHT FIELD
KV
MA
MS
DENSITY
NOTE: DO NOT SWITCH OFF THE GENERATOR WHILE IN *RECEPTOR SETUP [SYM]
DEFAULTS* MENUS 4 AND 5. DOING SO WILL CAUSE THE UPDATED RECEPTOR
SETUP PARAMETERS NOT TO BE SAVED. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE FIRST
RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING BE COMPLETED, THE RECEPTOR SETUP MENUS BE EXITED
TO THE GEN CONFIGURATION MENU, THEN THE RECEPTOR SETUP MENU BE
RESELECTED TO PROGRAM THE NEXT RECEPTOR. THE ABOVE SHOULD BE REPEATED
UNTIL ALL RECEPTORS ARE PROGRAMMED. THIS WILL ENSURE THAT THE UPDATED
PARAMETERS ARE SAVED.
Use these steps to set up the receptor parameters.

Step Action
1. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu select RECEPTOR SETUP.
2. Select the desired receptor to be programmed.
3. Use the NEXT, and BACK buttons to navigate through the screens. As noted
earlier, the RECEPTOR SETUP [SYM] DEFAULTS menus (if enabled) are
accessed by selecting DEFAULTS in screen 3.
4. Select the appropriate parameter to change. Refer to the definitions on the
previous pages in this section.
5. Certain selections are toggled (press the selection button again to change the
value), other parameters must be selected via the adjacent selection button.
The values are then changed using the + and - buttons.
6. When finished setting the parameters and/or defaults for the current receptor,
press the << or EXIT button(s) as required to return to the GEN
CONFIGURATION menu.
7. Reselect RECEPTOR SETUP, then select the next receptor to be programmed.
8. When finished programming all receptors, return to the GEN
CONFIGURATION menu as per step 6.
3C.5.4 I/O Configuration
The I/O CONFIGURATION menus allow programming the states of exposure for the inputs and the
outputs on the room interface board.
* INPUTS [sym] *
REMOTE EXP : ...__...__... STANDBY STATE
REMOTE PREP: ...__...........
REMOTE FL. EXP: .............---
CONSOLE EXP: ...---...---...
EXIT ⇑ >>
* INPUTS [sym] *
CONSOLE PREP: ...---......... STANDBY STATE
TOMO EXP: ........ ---...
REM. TOMO SEL.: ---............
I/I SAFETY: ...---...------
<< ⇑ >>
* INPUTS [sym] *
COLL. ITLK: ...---...------ STANDBY STATE
BUCKY CONTACTS: .........---...
SPARE: ------...------
THERMAL SW 1: ------...------
<< ⇑ >>
* INPUTS [sym] *
THERMAL SW 2: -----...----- STANDBY STATE
DOOR ITLK: ----- ...-----
MULTI SPOT EXP: ---............
<< ⇑ >>
3C.5.4 I/O Configuration (cont)
* OUTPUTS [sym] *
BKY 1 SELECT: --------------- STANDBY STATE
BKY 2 SELECT: ---------------
BKY 3 SELECT: ---------------
TOMO/BKY 4 SEL: ---------------
<< ⇑ >>
* OUTPUTS [sym] *
TOMO/BKY STRT: --------------- STANDBY STATE
ALE: ---------------
COLL. BYPASS: ---------------
<< ⇑ >>
* OUTPUTS [sym] *
ROOM LIGHT: --------------- STANDBY STATE
SPARE: ---------------
<< ⇑ RETURN
The STATE button on the upper right hand side of the menu selects the current state. The word
STATE will be preceded by the description of the state: for example, STANDBY.
The arrow in the lower middle area points to one of the five states described below. Moving to the
next state is accomplished by pressing the STATE button. The states are as follows:
• STANDBY Sets state of the I/O when the generator is in standby or idle
mode. Standby mode also defines the state when the generator
is in fluoroscopic hangover.
• PREP Sets state of the I/O when the generator first enters PREP
mode.
• GEN RDY Sets state of the I/O when the generator has completed PREP
mode and is ready to expose.
• RAD EXP Sets state of the I/O when the generator starts a radiographic
exposure.
• FLUORO EXP Sets state of the I/O when the generator starts a fluoroscopic
exposure.
3C.5.4 I/O Configuration (cont)
Pressing one of the buttons next to the selected function on the left of the display selects that function.
The logic level of the selected state is then changed by pressing the selection button again (low =
off/inactive, high = on/active).
For inputs, a logic “low” means that the input is ignored during that state. A Logic “high” requires
that the input be satisfied before the generator will advance to the next state. If multiple inputs are
programmed “high”, for example if REMOTE PREP and CONSOLE PREP are both high in the prep state,
then both inputs will need to be active before the generator will enter the prep state.
Setting an output to logic “low” causes the relay associated with that output to be de-energized
during the selected state. Logic “high” will cause the associated relay to be energized during the selected
state.
Certain functions have states indicated by a dotted line. The dotted line indicates invalid states,
which cannot be altered. Only states shown by a solid line can be changed. Refer to figure 3C-2 for
examples of a TYPICAL input configuration.
1 2 3 4 5
REM O TE EXP: ... ... ...
1 = S TA N D B Y S TATE (ca nn ot b e ch an ge d)
2 = P R E P S TAT E (sh ow n lo w /ina ctive)
3 = G E N R D Y STATE (ca nn ot be cha n ge d)
4 = R A D E X P S TATE (sho w n high /active)
5 = FLU O R O E X P S TATE (ca nn ot be cha n ge d)
FILE: M L_IO STE.CDR
Figure 3C-2: Example of input states
NOTE: IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE I/O CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET BE FILLED IN FOR

EACH INPUT OR OUTPUT THAT IS PROGRAMMED. A BLANK FORM THAT SHOULD BE
PHOTOCOPIED IS LOCATED IN SECTION 3A.5.0. THIS WILL PROVIDE A RECORD OF THE
I/O CONFIGURATION FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
Use these steps for programming the I/O functions

Step Action
1. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu, select I/O CONFIGURATION.
2. Select the desired receptor to be programmed.
3. Select the desired input(s) or output(s) to program. Use the >>, <<, and RETURN
buttons to navigate through the screens.
4. Press the STATE button to cycle through and select the desired state to program.
5. Select the function to be programmed (example REMOTE EXP). Press the
selection button again to change the logic level for that state. States with dashed
lines (...) CANNOT BE CHANGED.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each state in the selected I/O function.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 for each input or output to be programmed.
8. When finished the I/O programming for the current receptor, press the << or EXIT
button(s) as required to return to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
9. Reselect I/O CONFIGURATION, then select the next receptor to be programmed.
10. When finished programming all receptors, return to the GEN CONFIGURATION
menu as per step 8.
3C.5.5 AEC Setup
The AEC SETUP menu allows the setting of AEC parameters for each AEC channel.
* AEC SETUP*
CHANNEL: 1 CHAMBER TYPE: ION
LEFT FIELD: YES FILM SCREEN 1 : YES
CENTER FIELD: YES FILM SCREEN 2 : YES
RIGHT FIELD: YES FILM SCREEN 3 : YES
EXIT
Definitions of AEC SETUP parameters as used in this section.

• CHANNEL Selects the AEC channel to be programmed.
• LEFT FIELD Enables or disables the left field for the selected AEC channel
(NO is disabled).
• CENTER FIELD As above but for center field.
• RIGHT FIELD As above but for right field.
• CHAMBER TYPE Selects ION CHAMBER or SOLID STATE (S/S) chamber for
the selected AEC channel.
• FILM SCREEN 1 Enables or disables the selection of FILM SCREEN 1 for that
AEC channel (NO is disabled).
• FILM SCREEN 2 As above but for film screen 2.
• FILM SCREEN 3 As above but for film screen 2.
Use these steps to perform the AEC SETUP.

Step Action
1. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu select AEC SETUP.
2. Select the AEC channel to be setup. Pressing the CHANNEL button will scroll
through the available AEC channels.
3. Select the desired parameter to change.
4. Press the selection button for that parameter to toggle the available selections.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to program each AEC channel.
6. When finished the AEC SETUP, press EXIT to return to the GEN
CONFIGURATION menu.
3C.5.6 AEC Calibration
Refer to chapter 3 section 3D, AEC CALIBRATION.
3C.5.7 Fluoro Setup
Refer to chapter 3 section 3E, ABS CALIBRATION.
3C.5.8 Tube Calibration
Refer to chapter 2, the section TUBE AUTO CALIBRATION.
3C.6.0 DATA LINK
This is used with the CPI GenWare utility software. This allows for data communication with a computer
2 2
in order to download additional tube types, transfer APR data, run the A EC  utility, and for other minor
functions. Further documentation is included with the software package in the form of an MS word
document (MANUAL.DOC).
A computer (i.e. laptop) and a 9 pin null modem cable with socket connectors (female) on both
ends are required to run this software and interface to the generator.
CPI Canada Inc. AEC Calibration 3D
CHAPTER 3
SECTION 3D
AEC CALIBRATION
CONTENTS:
3D.1.0 INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................................3D-2
2 2 TM
3D.1.1 A EC (Automated Automatic Exposure Control Calibration)..................................................................3D-2
3D.1.2 AEC Limitations: Minimum Response Time.................................................................................................3D-3
3D.1.3 AEC Limitations: Maximum Exposure Times ...............................................................................................3D-4
3D.1.4 Film/Screen Response vs kVp .....................................................................................................................3D-5
3D.1.5 AEC Calibration Range.................................................................................................................................3D-6
3D.1.6 Multiple Spot Compensation.........................................................................................................................3D-7
3D.2.0 PRECALIBRATION SETUP.............................................................................................................................3D-8
3D.2.1 AEC Setup Worksheet..................................................................................................................................3D-8
3D.2.2 AEC Precalibration Checks ........................................................................................................................3D-10
3D.2.3 AEC Chamber Installation ..........................................................................................................................3D-10
3D.2.4 AEC Pickup Connections (Overview).........................................................................................................3D-12
3D.2.5 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers) ...........................................................................................................3D-13
3D.2.6 AEC Board (Ion Chambers)........................................................................................................................3D-15
3D.2.7 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board) ............................................................................................................3D-17
3D.2.8 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board With Short AEC Time Compensation) ...............................................3D-19
3D.2.9 AEC Using A PMT ......................................................................................................................................3D-21
3D.3.0 PRECALIBRATION NOTES: .........................................................................................................................3D-22
3D.4.0 ABSORBER EQUIVALENTS.........................................................................................................................3D-22
3D.5.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) ..........................................................................................................3D-23
3D.5.1 Break point calibration worksheet...............................................................................................................3D-28
3D.6.0 SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION (IF APPLICABLE)............................................................................3D-30
3D.7.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION ......................................................................................................................3D-31
3D.8.0 RLF COMPENSATION ..................................................................................................................................3D-35
3D.9.0 MULTIPLE SPOT COMPENSATION ............................................................................................................3D-38
3D.10.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY).........................................................................................................3D-40
3D.11.0 AEC CALIBRATION (AUX, SFD, ETC) ......................................................................................................3D-43
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-06 Rev. D Page 3D-1
3D AEC Calibration CPI Canada Inc.
3D.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This section covers interfacing and calibration of the various AEC board assemblies that are used in Millenia
and Indico 100 generators (for ion chambers, solid state chambers or PMT pickups).
PLEASE NOTE THAT THE GENERATOR IS FACTORY CONFIGURED FOR A SPECIFIC AEC
DEVICE(S). REFER TO THE CUSTOMER PRODUCT DESCRIPTION FORM IN CHAPTER 1 SECTION D
FOR THE FACTORY CONFIGURED AEC COMPATIBILITY OF THIS GENERATOR.
The introduction in this section contains background information relevant to AEC operation. It is strongly
suggested that this be read and understood prior to beginning AEC calibration.
AEC calibration requires that a calibration curve be established which relates optical density to various kV
breakpoints.
The 75 kV knee breakpoint is calibrated at the slowest film screen combination. The remaining kV
breakpoints are calibrated next, then the breakpoint calibration is repeated at the next highest film speed,
with the highest film speed being calibrated last.
After breakpoint calibration, ± density setup is done at the slowest film speed, then RLF
compensation and multiple spot compensation are done if desired.
2 2 TM
3D.1.1 A EC (Automated Automatic Exposure Control Calibration)
2 2 TM
The optional A EC kit automates most of the AEC calibration functions, simplifying and reducing AEC
calibration time by up to 80%. The kit consists of a photo detector which is placed inside the film cassette, a
2 2 TM 2 2 TM
preamplifier, interface cabling and adapters, A EC software, and an A EC instruction manual all
packaged in a convenient carrying case.
2 2 TM TM
The A EC system must be used in conjunction with the CPI GenWare utility software. Refer to
the section DATA LINK at the end of chapter 3C for information on equipment required to run the
TM
GenWare software.
Please contact the factory for further information.
Page 3D-2 Rev. D Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-06
3D.1.2 AEC Limitations: Minimum Response Time
The X-ray generator (including the AEC pickup chamber) has a minimum response time from start of the
exposure command to a kV value sufficient to start X-rays. There is a further delay to the start of current flow
from the AEC device. Likewise, there is a minimum response time from when the AEC stop command is
issued to when the kV has actually decreased to the point that X-rays are no longer produced. Figure 3D-1
depicts this graphically.
Figure 3D-1: Relative timing of AEC ramp vs exposure command and kVp
• 1 to 2 is the time from the exposure start command to kVp start.

Time = 1 to 3 ms.
• 2 to 3 is the reaction time of the solid state/ion chamber to start a current flow.
Time = 1 to 3 ms.
• 3 to 4 is the required exposure time.
• 4 is the AEC stop command from the generator AEC circuits.
• 4 to 5 is the generator shut down time including cable discharge time etc.
Time = 1.5 to 3.0 ms.
• 1 to 6 is the total time the exposure switch is activated.
• FOR AEC BOARDS WITH SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION (FIGURE 3D-9 AND 3D-11) AEC
TECHNIQUES SHOULD HAVE MINIMUM EXPOSURE TIMES GREATER THAN 5 MS. FOR ALL
OTHER AEC BOARDS MINIMUM EXPOSURE TIMES SHOULD BE GREATER THAN 15 MS.
3D.1.3 AEC Limitations: Maximum Exposure Times
AEC exposures should normally be kept well under one second. When X-ray techniques are used that result
in longer exposures, the film density will not be correct due to failure of reciprocity of the film.
RLF (reciprocity law failure) compensation is provided to compensate for longer AEC exposure
times. An offset may be added to each AEC calibration set (each film screen combination) to increase the
AEC ON time as exposure time increases. RLF compensation is applied to the following range of times:
• 50 ms to 500 ms
• 500 ms to 1000 ms
• 1000 ms and above.
Care must be exercised when using table buckys with low kV values because most table tops and grids
absorb considerable radiation in the range of 60 - 65 kVp. This will adversely affect AEC operation.
Figure 3D-2 shows the effect of kVp, optical density, and radiation. Note particularly the nonlinear change in
density at 85-90 kVp.
Figure 3D-2: kVp vs optical density vs dose
3D.1.4 Film/Screen Response vs kVp
Film screen response to kVp is not linear, therefore compensation must be provided in order to maintain
constant film density as kVp is changed for different anatomical studies. By selecting and calibrating various
kV breakpoints, the overall system response will be compensated such as to yield a constant film density.
Up to eight breakpoints per film screen combination are available. The eight breakpoints are spread
over three kV ranges as shown below:
• Low kV: 50, 55, 65 kV

• Knee kV: 75 kV
• High kV: 85, 95, 110, 130 kV.
Refer to figure 3D-3.
Figure 3D-3: kV breakpoints vs relative density
3D.1.5 AEC Calibration Range
Since the Millenia and Indico 100 family of generators allow for up to three separate film screen
combinations to be calibrated, the following points must be considered :
• The AEC board allows for a 0 to a maximum of 10 volt ramp at the comparator input. All AEC signals
must fit within this range (for all film/screens, densities, and techniques).
• Most x-ray applications require the use of two or more different film screen combinations, all of which will
require different exposure doses.
• Using the slowest film screen combination, the required film input dose will be determined.
• Once this value is determined (during AEC calibration) the density calibration is performed to allow 100%
(double the dose) and 50% (half the dose) values. These are typical values and will determine the
maximum required range of the AEC reference voltage (output from the D/A converter).
• Figure 3D-4 illustrates the different windows required for various film screen combinations.
Figure 3D-4: Film/screen speed vs. D/A output
3D.1.6 Multiple Spot Compensation
Separate density compensation is provided when a SFD (Spot Film Device) is used for multiple film splits.
This allows compensation when the SFD diaphragm is in the X-ray field.
An external output from the SFD must be provided when multiple spots are requested to enable this
function.
3D.1.7 A Typical R&F Room
Figure 3D-5 below shows source-image distances and image receptors as used in a typical R&F installation.
Figure 3D-5: Typical R&F installation
3D.2.0 PRECALIBRATION SETUP
3D.2.1 AEC Setup Worksheet
Before continuing, it is suggested that a copy of the table below be filled in with all required information. Refer
to the example AEC setup worksheet on the next page.
FUNCTION RECEPTOR 1 RECEPTOR 2 RECEPTOR 3 RECEPTOR 4

Film/Screen 1.
2.
3.
Nominal optical density:
Grid ratio/SID:
Min - max kVp range:
± Density steps ∗
Density dose +%:
change
(per step)∗ -%:
Chamber type:
Regulatory AEC dose

requirements?
Is film processing maintained?
Assigned receptor name:
Are all cassettes similar?
Additional notes:
Additional notes:
Table 3D-1: AEC setup worksheet
ALL RECEPTORS MUST HAVE THE SAME NUMBER OF DENSITY STEPS AND THE SAME DENSITY DOSE
CHANGE PER STEP (DENSITY SETTINGS ARE COMMON TO ALL FILM SCREENS AND RECEPTORS).
3D.2.1 AEC Setup Worksheet (Cont)
Note: The example below is supplied for reference only. It does not represent an actual installation.
FUNCTION RECEPTOR 1 RECEPTOR 2 RECEPTOR 3 RECEPTOR 4

Film/Screen 1. Lanex/reg Lanex/reg Lanex/reg PMT/I.I.
2. Lanex/med Lanex/chest
3.
Nominal optical density: 1.2 1.1 1.4
Grid ratio/SID: 12:1 8:1 10:1 10:1
Min - max kVp range: 60 - 120 65 - 140 80 - 110 70 - 120
± Density steps ±8 ±8 ±8 ±8
Density dose +%: 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5

change
(per step) -%: 6.25 6.25 6.25 6.25
Chamber type: Ion Solid state Ion PMT
Regulatory AEC dose Yes Yes Yes Yes

requirements?
Is film processing maintained? Yes Yes Yes Yes
Assigned receptor name: Table Wall SFD Digital
Are all cassettes similar? Yes Yes Yes N/A
Additional notes:
Additional notes:
Table 3D-2: Sample AEC setup worksheet
3D.2.2 AEC Precalibration Checks
It is recommended that a copy of the form below be filled in with the required information before attempting
AEC calibration.
1. Verify that the AEC chambers are mounted correctly CHECK √:

in the bucky or spot film device. Note that some
chamber types must be physically isolated from
equipment ground, refer to figure 3D-6 as an
example.
2. Verify that each AEC chamber/pickup is properly CHECK √:
connected to its intended input channel on the AEC
board.
Refer to AEC board pictorials, figure 3D-8 to 3D-
10 for input channel designations
3.
Make and type of AEC chamber/pickup: AEC Ch 1_____________________________
AEC Ch 2_____________________________
AEC Ch 3_____________________________
AEC Ch 4_____________________________
4. Verify signal grounding for the AEC chamber. The CHECK √:
only electrical ground should be at the AEC board in
the generator. This applies to the ground braid
(shield) for the AEC signal cable and to the ground
return conductor(s) in the AEC signal cable.
5. Verify that the AEC board is fully inserted into the CHECK √:
mating edge connector (if applicable), that all
connections to the AEC board are secure, and that
the AEC board is properly fastened to the door
support panel.
6. Before calibrating, verify that the AEC system is CHECK √:
functioning. This includes the AEC
chambers/devices and the AEC circuits in the
generator. Each of the fields on the AEC device
must be able to terminate the exposure.
7. Radiographic techniques to be performed with the
equipment (high kV chest, G.I. studies etc)?
8. Normal exposure factors used by the customer
(typical mAs/kV range)?
Table 3D-3: Precalibration checklist
3D.2.3 AEC Chamber Installation
Figure 3D-6 shows an installed AEC chamber. Note particularly the use of a suitable insulating material to
isolate the body of the chamber from the receptor ground. This is required for non-insulated AEC chambers.
3D.2.3 AEC Chamber Installation (Cont)
Figure 3D-6: AEC chamber installation
3D.2.4 AEC Pickup Connections (Overview)
Review the applicable sections of chapter 3 section B and C for interfacing AEC devices and programming
the image receptors to select the correct AEC device (or no AEC if desired). It should be ensured that each
receptor used for AEC has a bucky or equivalent. A typical R&F room configuration will consist of the
following:
• Table bucky
• Wall bucky
• Spot film bucky
• Aux - digital acquisition
Refer to Figure 3D-7 for typical AEC connections. This is a simplified view only, refer to figures 3D-8 to 3D-11
for AEC board layouts used in Millenia and Indico 100 generators. Refer to chapter 1E for the AEC board
location in your generator.
Figure 3D-7: AEC pickup connections
3D.2.5 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers)
The AEC board shown below is compatible with various makes/models of solid state chambers (i.e. Comet,
Ziehm, Gilardoni). This AEC board is used in various models of generators requiring those AEC chamber
types.
This board will be fitted with 6 pin circular connectors (J1 to J4) or with 5 pin in-line connectors (J11
to J14), depending on the application.
Figure 3D-8: Dedicated solid state AEC board
AEC board input assignment:
• Ch 1 = J1/J11 - Table Radiographic Bucky.

• Ch 2 = J2/J12 - Vertical Wall Bucky.
• Ch 3 = J3/J13 - Spot Film Device
• Ch 4 = J4/J14 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc.)
The following potentiometers are used for AEC gain adjustment:
• R1 is used for channel 1 gain adjustment.

3D.2.5 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers) Cont
The following tables show the pinouts for both the 6 pin circular connectors and for the 5 pin in-line
connectors on the AEC board in figure 3D-8.
FUNCTION PIN
Anode 1 NOTE: PINS 1, 2, AND 3 ON THE
Anode 2 CIRCULAR CONNECTOR ARE
Anode 3 ALL CONNECTED IN PARALLEL.
Cathode, left 4
Cathode, right 5
Cathode, middle 6
Ground Connector shell
Table 3D-4: Pinouts for 6 pin circular connector
FUNCTION PIN
Anode 2
Cathode, left 3
Cathode, right 5
Cathode, middle 4
Ground 1
Table 3D-5: Pinouts for 5 pin in-line connector
If the AEC input signal has excessive electrical noise superimposed on the signal, it is suggested that
jumpers JW1 to JW4 as appropriate be temporarily installed. If this improves the signal to noise ratio, the
jumper(s) should be left in. Excessive signal to noise ratio generally shows up as inconsistent AEC exposure
times at low mAs values.
It is the responsibility of the installer to determine the need for these jumper(s).
3D.2.6 AEC Board (Ion Chambers)
The AEC board shown below is compatible with various makes/models of ion chambers (i.e. AID, GE,
Vacutec, Philips Amplimat). This AEC board is used in various models of generators requiring those AEC
chamber types and requiring short AEC time compensation.
This board will be fitted with 15 pin D connectors (J11 to J14) or with 12 pin in-line connectors (J1 to
J4), depending on the application.
Figure 3D-9: Dedicated ion chamber AEC board
AEC board input assignment:
• Ch 1 = J1/J11 - Table Radiographic Bucky.

• Ch 2 = J2/J12 - Vertical Wall Bucky.
• Ch 3 = J3/J13 - Spot Film Device
• Ch 4 = J4/J14 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc.)

3D.2.6 AEC Board (Ion Chambers) Cont
The following potentiometers are used for short AEC exposure time compensation:
• R11 is used for channel 1 short exposure time compensation.

R79 adjusts the output of the high voltage bias supply. This is only fitted on versions of this board intended for
use with ion chambers which require a separate high voltage bias supply. R79 adjusts the value of the +300
and/or the +500 and the +45 VDC outputs, and should be set as per the ion chamber manufacturer
specifications.
The following tables show the pinouts for both the 15 pin D connectors and for the 12 pin in-line connectors
on the AEC board in figure 3D-9.
FUNCTION PIN NOTE

+300 or +500 VDC output 1 +500 and/or +300, and +45 VDC outputs are
provided on configurations of this board
Not used 2 designed to interface to ion chambers requiring
Right field select 3 these voltage outputs only. Pin 1 will be wired
Start command output 4 to supply +300 VDC OR +500 VDC, as per the
+45 VDC output 5 AEC chanber requirements.
-24 VDC output 6
Signal input 7
Ground 8
Not used 9
Not used 10
Left field select 11
Middle field select 12
Ground 13
+12 VDC output 14
-12 VDC output 15
Table 3D-6: Pinouts for 15 pin D connector
FUNCTION PIN NOTE

+500 VDC output 1 +500, +300, +45 VDC outputs are provided on
+300 VDC output 2 configurations of this board designed to
+45 VDC output 3 interface to ion chambers requiring these
+12 VDC output 4 voltage outputs only.
-12 VDC output 5
-24 VDC output 6 +12, -12, -24 VDC outputs are typically used as
Ground 7 the DC supply for a pre-amplifier, often part of
Start command output 8 the ion chamber.
Left field select 9
Middle field select 10
Right field select 11
Signal input 12
Table 3D-7: Pinouts for 12 pin in-line connector
3D.2.7 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board)
The AEC board shown below is factory configured to be compatible with most makes/models of AEC
chambers (ion and solid state) on the market. This assembly also contains a low current, high voltage supply
for a photomultiplier tube (PMT). The PMT supply is located on the upper board, which also contains the
connectors to interface to the AEC pickup device(s).
Figure 3D-10: Universal AEC board
AEC board input/output assignment:
• Ch 1 = J1 - Table Radiographic Bucky.

• Ch 2 = J2 - Vertical Wall Bucky.
• Ch 3 = J3 - Spot Film Device.
• Ch 4 = J4 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc.).
• J7 = High voltage output for the PMT (if used)

Refer to the end of subsection 3D.2.7 for the procedure for adjusting R10, R19, and R24.
3D.2.7 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board) Cont
The following table shows the pinouts for the 12 pin connectors J1 to J4 on the AEC board in figure 3D-10
and 3D-11. The pins on J7 are all connected in parallel, thus the PMT high voltage may be taken from any of
the pins on that connector.
The connections to the AEC pickup chamber vary considerably between ion chambers and solid
state chambers. For clarity two tables are shown below, the first for ion chambers and the second for solid
state chambers.
FUNCTION PIN NOTE

+500 VDC output 1 +500, +300, +50 VDC outputs provided for ion
+300 VDC output 2 chamber use if required. +12, -12, -24 VDC
+50 VDC output 3 outputs are typically used as the DC supply for
+12 VDC output 4 a pre-amplifier, often part of the ion chamber.
-12 VDC output 5
-24 VDC output 6 The start command, and left, middle, right
Ground 7 field select outputs are jumper configured to
Start command output 8 be active high or active low as per the AEC
Left field select 9 chamber requirements. The signal input is
Middle field select 10 jumper configured to accept a positive going
Right field select 11 or negative going ramp or DC signal as per
Signal input 12 the AEC chamber output.
Table 3D-8: Ion chamber connections
FUNCTION PIN NOTE

+500 VDC output 1 Not used for solid state AEC chambers
-12 VDC output 5 Not used for solid state AEC chambers
-24 VDC output 6 Not used for solid state AEC chambers
Ground 7 Connect pin 8 to pin 7 (ground). Connect the
Start 8 common anodes for left, middle, right to pin 8.
Left 9 Connect cathode (left) to LEFT, cathode middle
Middle 10 to MIDDLE, and cathode right to RIGHT.
Right 11 Cable shield (if used) connects to pin 8.
Signal input 12 Not used for solid state AEC chambers
Table 3D-9: Solid state chamber connections
3D.2.7 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board) Cont
R10, R19 and R24 adjust the output voltage from the high voltage power supply on the AEC interface board
(the upper board on the universal AEC board assembly in figure 3D-10 and 3D-11). This high voltage supply
generates the PMT high voltage, up to approximately -1000 VDC available at J7, and also the nominal +500,
+300 and +50 VDC supplies noted in table 3D-8. The +500, +300 and +50 VDC supplies are available to bias
ion chambers if needed and are adjustable as defined below.
These potentiometers are switched into the circuit electronically by logic circuits connected to the
AEC channel select commands. Only one potentiometer will be active at any given time, the condition under
which each potentiometer is active is described below, along with the function of that potentiometer.
• R10 adjusts the high voltage supply output for the PMT when ABS operation is selected. This is
described in chapter 3E.
• R24 adjusts the high voltage supply output when AEC channel 1, 2, or 3 is selected. AEC channels 1, 2,
3 are normally used with an AEC chamber.
R24 will be used to adjust the +500, +300 and +50 VDC bias voltage outputs if required for ion
chamber(s) connected to AEC channels 1, 2 or 3.
• R19 adjusts the high voltage supply output when AEC channel 4 is selected. AEC channel 4 is normally
used for digital acquisition or spot film work using a PMT pickup for AEC control. This will typically be the
same PMT used for ABS control during fluoroscopy operation.
Refer to 3D.2.9 for further details if using a PMT for AEC control on AEC channel 4.
3D.2.8 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board With Short AEC Time Compensation)
The AEC board shown below has short AEC time compensation, and is factory configured to be compatible
with most makes/models of AEC chambers (ion and solid state) on the market. This assembly also contains
a low current, high voltage supply for a photomultiplier tube (PMT). The PMT supply is located on the upper
board, which also contains the connectors to interface to the AEC pickup device(s).
Figure 3D-11: Universal AEC board with short AEC time compensation
3D.2.8 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board With Short AEC Time Compensation) Cont
In order to clearly show the adjustment pots on the lower (AEC) board, the upper board which
contains the AEC and PMT interface connectors and the high voltage supply is shown shifted
from its actual position.
AEC board input/output assignment:
• Ch 1 = J1 - Table Radiographic Bucky.

• Ch 2 = J2 - Vertical Wall Bucky.
• Ch 3 = J3 - Spot Film Device.
• Ch 4 = J4 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc.).
• J7 = High voltage output for the PMT (if used)

The following potentiometers are used for short AEC exposure time compensation:

Refer to tables 3D-8 and 3D-9 for the connector pinouts. Refer to the end of subsection 3D.2.7 for the
procedure for adjusting R10, R19, and R24.
3D.2.9 AEC Using A PMT
WARNING: SWITCH OFF THE GENERATOR BEFORE CONNECTING A PMT, AND USE APPROPRIATE
HIGH VOLTAGE PRECAUTIONS WHEN MEASURING THE PMT HIGH VOLTAGE.
The following applies if a PMT is to be used for AEC control on channel 4 as described above. It is suggested
that the AEC calibration on AEC channels 1, 2, and 3 as applicable be done first (sections 3D.5.0 to 3D.11.0)
before calibrating AEC channel 4.
Step Action
1. Route the output signal from the PMT to AEC input channel 4 as per figure 3D-12. The
resistor divider network will need to be provided by the installer. Appropriate high voltage
shielded cable should be used for the PMT signal connections.
2. Set the PMT voltage to approximately -650 VDC for AEC operation using R19 on the
AEC interface board. Note that AEC channel 4 must be selected in order for R19 to be
made active.
USE TP5 ONLY ON THE AEC INTERFACE BOARD (FIGURE 3D-10, 3D-11) FOR
THE HV METER GROUND WHEN MEASURING PMT HIGH VOLTAGE. CONNECT
THE GROUND LEAD FIRST BEFORE MEASURING THE HIGH VOLTAGE. DO NOT
ATTEMPT TO MEASURE THIS WITHOUT A SUITABLE METER.
3. Follow the procedure in section 3D.5.0 steps 6 to 14. In the AEC SETUP menu, select
ION chamber, FILM SCREEN 1 only, and CENTER FIELD only.
4. Enter the calibration value 45 into EACH of the kV breakpoints. The procedure is detailed
in step 16 of 3D.5.0 for the 75 kV knee breakpoint. The remaining breakpoints are set in
a similar manner (refer to the balance of 3D.5.0 for details on accessing those breakpoint
settings).
5. Adjust R28 on the AEC board for the desired I.I. input exposure dose.
6. The PMT voltage that was set in step 2 may need to be adjusted up or down if R28 does
not provide the desired adjustment range in step 5.
Figure 3D-12: Connections for PMT AEC
3D.3.0 PRECALIBRATION NOTES:
This section contains information that must be understood and confirmed prior to and/or during AEC
calibration.
CAUTION: THE PROCEDURES IN THESE SECTIONS REQUIRE X-RAY EXPOSURES. TAKE ALL
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM X-RADIATION.
SHOULD AN IMPROPER TECHNIQUE BE SELECTED, OR AN AEC FAULT OCCUR CAUSING NO AEC

FEEDBACK SIGNAL TO THE GENERATOR, THE EXPOSURE WILL TERMINATE IF THE RAMP
VOLTAGE FAILS TO REACH 4% OF THE EXPECTED RAMP VOLTAGE WHEN THE EXPOSURE TIME
REACHES 20% OF THE SELECTED B.U.T. (B.U.T. = BACK UP TIME).
• When using PMTs or photo diodes for AEC from the output of an image intensifier, there is normally
no need to iterate all the kV break points. It is usually sufficient to use the 75 kV breakpoint
calibration value for that film screen at all kV breakpoints. If doing this, the calibration values should
be confirmed using the acquired digital images at all kV breakpoints.
• During calibration, all AEC exposures should be done using mA values such that the exposures are
in the 30 to 100 ms range UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE.
• During AEC calibration, always ensure that the central ray is centered relative to the image receptor.
• Prior to placing the absorbers, ensure that the collimator is opened sufficiently to cover ALL fields on
the AEC pickup device.
• Ensure that the absorber is positioned such as to fully cover the X-ray field. The absorber must
extend a minimum of 3/8″ (10 mm) beyond the X-ray field.
• All components/assemblies used during AEC calibration must be those which will be used during
procedures, and must be positioned as they will be in actual use of the X-ray room.
• The generator must be known to be calibrated before proceeding.
• During AEC calibration, if exposure times do not change if the mA is varied, it may be that the input
signal level to the AEC board may be too high. If this is experienced, check the ramp voltage at the
output of the first gain stage (the first operational amplifier output) on the AEC board for the subject
AEC channel. This voltage must never exceed 10 V. If this voltage does exceed 10 V, reduce the
input signal level as required.
3D.4.0 ABSORBER EQUIVALENTS
The following calibration procedure details the use of copper absorbers. Water or aluminum may be used as
an absorber instead of copper if required. Table 3E-1 in chapter 3E (ABS calibration) lists water and
aluminum equivalents of selected copper thickness.
3D.5.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY)
Figure 3D-13: Equipment setup for table bucky AEC calibration
Step Action
SETUP FOR AEC CALIBRATION
IF THE AEC BOARD BEING CALIBRATED HAS SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION
(FIGURE 3D-9 OR 3D-11), THE SHORT EXPOSURE TIME COMPENSATION MUST FIRST BE
DISABLED.
TO DO THIS, ADJUST ALL SHORT AEC EXPOSURE TIME COMPENSATION
POTENTIOMETERS TO ZERO, IE SUCH THAT THE WIPERS ON EACH POT ARE GROUNDED.
VERIFY THE CORRECT SETTINGS BY USING AN OHMETER ON LOW OHMS RANGE AND
ENSURING A NEAR ZERO OHMS READING FROM THE WIPER OF EACH SHORT AEC TIME
COMPENSATION POT TO GROUND. REFER TO TABLE 3D-11 FOR THE SHORT AEC TIME
COMPENSATION POTENTIOMETER DESIGNATIONS.
FAILURE TO PRESET THESE POTS WILL RESULT IN DIFFICULTY IN PERFORMING
AEC CALIBRATION.
1. Set up the X-ray tube stand as shown in figure 3D-13.
2. Align the tube stand and table bucky such that the central ray is centered relative to the
image receptor.
3. Open up the collimator to expose all three fields of the AEC pickup. Ensure that the
central ray remains centered relative to the image receptor.
4. Place the R probe at the film plane, i.e. behind the grid. If this cannot be done, then place
the probe on the table top. Ensure that the R-probe is located as close as possible to the
central ray, but not blocking any pickup areas on the AEC device. The R meter must be
set to measure in the micro-R range.
3D.5.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont
Step Action
5. Place 1.5 mm of copper (pure grade) in front of the collimator, ensuring that the radiation
is COMPLETELY blocked by the absorber.
6. Place the generator into the programming mode. Refer to section 3C.1.1.
7. From the GENERATOR SETUP menu select GEN CONFIGURATION.
8. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu select AEC SETUP.
9. Set up the AEC parameters in the AEC SETUP menu FOR EACH ACTIVE AEC
CHANNEL. Refer to section 3C.5.5 for definitions of the items in the AEC SETUP menu.
10. Set up the image receptors in the RECEPTOR SETUP menu such that each receptor
has the desired AEC channel assigned to it. Refer to section 3C.5.3 for RECEPTOR
SETUP information.
11. In the RECEPTOR SETUP menu, set MEMORY to NO for each image receptor. This
will ensure that the next receptor being calibrated will not remember the techniques from
the previous receptor.
The MEMORY function may be reset as desired after AEC calibration is completed.
12. In the RECEPTOR SETUP menu, ensure that the AEC BACKUP MAS and AEC
BACKUP MS are set sufficiently high that the generator backup timer will not terminate
the exposure.
13. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu select AEC CALIBRATION.
14. From the AEC CALIBRATION menu select FILM SCREEN 1 (the slowest film screen
combination).
CAUTION: DURING THE FOLLOWING CALIBRATION PROCEDURE, BE SURE THAT THE SELECTED
TECHNIQUES WILL NOT OVERLOAD THE X-RAY TUBE. USE CAUTION WHEN REPEATING
EXPOSURES AS THIS MAY QUICKLY OVERLOAD THE X-RAY TUBE. MOST X-RAY TUBE
MANUFACTURERS RECOMMEND NO MORE THAN TWO HIGH SPEED STARTS PER MINUTE.
NOTE: BE SURE TO USE THE SAME CASSETTE FOR EACH EXPOSURE AT THAT FILM SPEED.
AEC BOARD CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 3 CHANNEL 4

Solid State (Fig 3D-8) R1 R2 R3 R4
Ion Chamber (Fig 3D-9) R1 R2 R3 R4
Universal (Fig 3D-10) R1 R26 R27 R28
Table 3D-10: AEC board gain pot designations
AEC BOARD CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 3 CHANNEL 4

Ion Chamber (Fig 3D-9) R11 R12 R13 R14
Table 3D-11: Short AEC time compensation pot designations
The following screens are used for AEC calibration

* AEC CALIBRATION *
FILM SCREEN 1 DENSITY SETUP
FILM SCREEN 2
FILM SCREEN 3
EXIT
*TUBE? 0%HU AEC CAL, F/S 1*

50KV: 84.0: 85KV: 42.8
55KV: 78.0: 95KV: 38.0
65KV: 66.0: +
75KV: 54.0 -
3200MS << >>

110KV: 34.0:
130KV: 28.0:
RLF COMPENSATION +
MULT. SPOT COMP: 0% -
3200MS <<
Step Action
75 KV KNEE BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
15. Select the table bucky image receptor.
16. Select the 75 kV knee breakpoint and enter the value 45 using the + or - buttons
adjacent to the LCD display.
17. Select the appropriate mA for the first film speed being calibrated per table 3D-13,
remembering that the slowest film screen used in that installation must be calibrated first
(example 320 mA for 100 speed film). Select large focus, center field.
18. Make an exposure and note the dose and mAs.
19. Referring to table 3D-12, select the estimated dose required for the film speed being
calibrated i.e. 1025 ± 25 µR (see note on next page regarding conversion of µR to µGy if
desired) at the 75 kV knee breakpoint for 100 speed film.
Note that the dose values in the table are based on the R-probe being located at
the film plane. If the probe was placed in front of the grid the dose values shown
in the tables must be increased accordingly. The dose in front of the grid will
typically be approximately double the dose at the film plane.
20. Adjust the required gain potentiometer on the AEC board (see note below) while taking
exposures until the dose noted in the previous step is obtained.
• CHANNEL 1 ON THE AEC BOARD IS TYPICALLY USED FOR THE TABLE
BUCKY AEC CHAMBER. YOUR INSTALLATION MAY USE A DIFFERENT
CHANNEL ON THE AEC BOARD.
• REFER TO TABLE 3D-10 FOR THE AEC BOARD GAIN POTENTIOMETER
(GAIN POT) DESIGNATIONS FOR THE VARIOUS AEC BOARDS.
FILM SPEED FILM PLANE DOSE @ 75 kV

100 1025 ± 25 uR
200 550 ± 25 uR
400 260 ± 12 uR
800 135 ± 12 uR
Table 3D-12: Estimated knee dose vs film speed @ 75 kV
These are TYPICAL dose inputs to the film cassette plane at an SID of 40″ (100mm), using a grid with
a 12:1 ratio.
NOTE: To convert from µR to µGy divide the value in µR by 100. This will give the value in µGy (for example
100 µR = 1 µGy.
Step Action
21. Load a test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Using the same
technique as in the previous step, expose the film and develop it.
22. Measure the optical density. The desired value should have been previously recorded in
a copy of table 3D-1.
23. If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the desired value, adjust the gain pot (as per
step 20) to increase or decrease the density, then repeat the previous two steps.
24. Once the desired film density is achieved, record the mAs, dose, calibration number and
O.D. in a copy of table 3D-14.
FOR EACH BREAKPOINT IN THE REMAINDER OF THIS SECTION, START WITH THE
SUGGESTED DOSE AS PER TABLE 3D-13. AFTER THAT DOSE IS ACHIEVED, A FILM MUST
BE EXPOSED AND THE O.D. VERIFIED. FURTHER DOSE ITERATIONS MAY BE REQUIRED TO
ACHIEVE THE DESIRED OPTICAL DENSITY.
DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT AFTER THE 75KV KNEE
BREAKPOINT IS CALIBRATED. DOSE/DENSITY ADJUSTMENTS WILL ONLY BE DONE BY
ADJUSTING THE CALIBRATION VALUES FOR THE OTHER KV BREAKPOINTS.
55 KV BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
25. Replace the 1.5 mm copper absorber previously installed with a 0.5 mm copper sheet.
As before, ensure that the absorber fully blocks the X-ray field.
26. Select the 55 kV breakpoint.
27. Make an exposure and note the dose. Use mA values as per table 3D-13.
28. Adjust the 55 kV calibration numbers using the + or - buttons such that the actual dose
is equal to the target dose at 55 kV for the selected film speed per table 3D-13.
DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT.
100 speed film screen

Break point Absorber Dose mAs Generator mA Generator BUT mAs
75 kV knee pt. 1.5 mm Cu. 1025 µ/R 59.2 mAs 320 mA 320 mAs (MAX)
55 kV 0.5 mm Cu. 1808 µ/R 54 mAs 320 mA 320 mAs (MAX)
65 kV 1.0 mm Cu 1436 µ/R 44 mAs 320 mA 320 mAs (MAX)
95 kV 4.5 mm Cu 1008 µ/R 44 mAs 320 mA 320 mAs (MAX)

Break point Absorber Dose mAs Generator mA Generator BUT mAs
75 kVp knee pt. 1.5 mm Cu. 518 µ/R 30 mAs 250 mA 250 mAs (MAX)
55 kVp 0.5 mm Cu. 904 µ/R 26 mAs 250 mA 250 mAs (MAX)
65 kVp 1.0 mm Cu 718 µ/R 22 mAs 250 mA 250 mAs (MAX)

Break Point Absorber Dose mAs Generator mA Generator BUT mAs
75 kVp knee pt. 1.5 mm Cu. 259 µ/R 14.8 mAs 200 mA 200 mAs (MAX)
85 kVp 4.0 mm Cu. 265 µ/R 13.5 mAs 200 mA 200 mAs (MAX)

Break Point Absorber Dose mAs Generator mA Generator BUT mAs
75 kVp knee pt. 1.5 mm Cu. 129 µ/R 7.4 mAs 110 mA 120 mAs (MAX)
50 kVp 0.5 mm Cu. 229µ/R 16 mAs 100 mA 120 mAs (MAX)
65 kVp 1.0 mm Cu 179 µ/R 5.5 mAs 100 mA 120 mAs (MAX)
95 kVp 4.5 mm Cu 126 µ/R 5.5 mAs 100 mA 120 mAs (MAX)
Table 3D-13: Breakpoint calibration factors

2
For SID’s other than 40″″ (100 cm) multiply the dose by the factor [new SID / 40 in.(100 cm)]
3D.5.1 Break point calibration worksheet
Record the final results in a copy of the table below. The final results are those obtained AFTER films have
been developed to verify the correct O.D. at each breakpoint.
FILM SCREEN 1 SPEED =

#1 BK. POINT = 75 kV mAs = DOSE = CAL. NO. = O.D. =


Table 3D-14: Breakpoint worksheet
Step Action
29. Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Using the same
technique, expose the film and develop it.
30. Measure the optical density. The optical density should be as per step 22.
31. If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the desired value, adjust the 55 kV calibration
number using the + or - buttons, then repeat the previous two steps.
DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT.
32. Once the desired film density is achieved, record the required values in a copy of table
3D-14.
33. If special techniques are NOT used which require the 50 kV range, simply enter the 55
kV calibration number into the 50 kV breakpoint using the + and - buttons.
Note that at approximately 55 kV and under, the screen film sensitivity becomes too low
for practical AEC operation when used with a bucky.
34. If the 50 kV range IS used, the 50 kV breakpoint must be calibrated. To do this select the
50 kV breakpoint. The 50 kV step will use the same absorber as used for the 55 kV step.
35. Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 50 kV breakpoint if desired, substituting 50 kV
where applicable in place of 55 kV.
36. Select the 65 kV breakpoint. Use copper thickness per table 3D-13 for the 65 kV
breakpoint.
37. Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 65 kV breakpoint, substituting 65 kV where
applicable in place of 55 kV.
38. IN THE FOLLOWING STEPS, SELECT >> AND << AS REQUIRED TO NAVIGATE
BETWEEN THE TWO BREAKPOINT SCREENS (SCREEN 1 LISTS BREAKPOINTS
50 KV TO 95 KV, SCREEN 2 SHOWS BREAKPOINTS 110 AND 130 KV).

breakpoint. Note that 200 mA is recommended for this step.

41. If special high kV techniques are NOT used which require the 130 kV range, enter the
110 kV calibration number into the 130 kV breakpoint using the + and - buttons.
42. If the 130 kV range IS used, the 130 kV breakpoint must be calibrated. To do this select
the 130 kV breakpoint. Use copper thickness per table 3D-13 for the 130 kV breakpoint.
Use 200 mA for this breakpoint as per table 3D-13.
43. Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 130 kV breakpoint if desired, substituting 130 kV
where applicable in place of 55 kV.
breakpoint.
Step Action
breakpoint.
48. Select << to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
Step Action
FILM SCREEN 2 BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
49. Select FILM SCREEN 2.
50. Repeat steps 16 to 48 as described for film screen 1 except:
WHEN CALIBRATING THE 75 KV KNEE BREAKPOINT FOR FILM SCREEN 2, DO

NOT ADJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT. DOSE ADJUSTMENTS MUST ONLY BE
MADE BY VARYING THE BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION NUMBERS.
FILM SCREEN 2 MUST BE THE NEXT HIGHEST FILM SPEED AFTER FILM
SCREEN 1.
Step Action
FILM SCREEN 3 BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
51. Select FILM SCREEN 3.
52. Repeat steps 16 to 48 as described for film screen 1 except:
WHEN CALIBRATING THE 75 KV KNEE BREAKPOINT FOR FILM SCREEN 3, DO

NOT ADJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT. DOSE ADJUSTMENTS MUST ONLY BE
MADE BY VARYING THE BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION NUMBERS.
FILM SCREEN 3 MUST BE THE HIGHEST FILM SPEED.
3D.6.0 SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION (IF APPLICABLE)
Step Action
SECTION 3D.6.0 ONLY APPLIES FOR AEC BOARDS WITH SHORT AEC
EXPOSURE TIME COMPENSATION (FIGURE 3D-9 OR 3D-11) IF AEC
EXPOSURES LESS THAN APPROXIMATELY 15 MS ARE REQUIRED .
1. Select the image receptor to be short AEC time compensated, ie table bucky.
2. Select the highest film speed used on the selected receptor, then select the 75 kV
breakpoint.
3. Set the mA per table 3D-13 for the film speed being used. Reinstall the absorber as per
table 3D-13 for the 75 kV breakpoint.
4. Make an exposure and confirm the dose (or mAs) readings as previously recorded in
table 3D-14.
5. Reduce the absorber thickness such as to decrease the AEC exposure time to
approximately 10 ms.
6. Adjust the short AEC time compensation pot for the AEC channel being calibrated such
that the dose (or mAs) is approximately the same as previously recorded (step 4). The
short AEC time compensation potentiometer designations are given in table 3D-11.
3D.6.0 SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION (IF APPLICABLE) Cont
Step Action
7. Reduce the absorber thickness again such as to decrease the AEC exposure time to
approximately 6 ms (but not less).
8. Adjust the short AEC time compensation pot for the AEC channel being calibrated such
that the dose (or mAs) is approximately the same as it was in step 6.
9. The short AEC time compensation adjustments affect the AEC calibration at longer
exposure times. Therefore, it may now be necessary to readjust the gain pot for the AEC
channel being calibrated to restore the dose (or mAs) values to the values previously
recorded in table 3D-14. Ensure that the absorber thickness and mA values are as per
table 3D-13 when readjusting the AEC gain pot.
10. Films should be exposed and developed, and the O.D. checked at the 75 kV breakpoint
at AEC exposure times of approximately 6 ms and approximately 100 ms. If the film
density is not acceptable at both short and long AEC exposure times, it will be necessary
to iterate the adjustments of both the short AEC time compensation pot and the AEC
gain pot by repeating steps 3 to 8.
11. Repeat steps 1 to 10 for each image receptor (AEC channel) to be short AEC time
compensated.
3D.7.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION
The following screens are used for density calibration

* AEC CALIBRATION *
FILM SCREEN 2
FILM SCREEN 3
EXIT
*TUBE? 0%HU *DENS. SE TUP*

-8: -
-7: -
-6: - +
-5: 62% -
3200MS EXIT >>
*TUBE? 0%HU *DENS. SETUP*

-4: 50%
-3: 37%
-2: 25% +
-1: 12% -
3200MS << >>
3D.7.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION (Cont)

+1: 12%
+2: 25%
+3: 37% +
+4: 50% -
3200MS << >>

+5: 62%
+6: -
+7: - +
+8: - -
3200MS << RETURN
Please note the following points regarding density calibration:
• Up to eight density plus and eight density minus steps are available. If ± 8 density steps are not required,
the unwanted density steps may be programmed out per the procedure below. For example, if only ± 5
density steps are desired, then density steps ± 6, 7, 8 may be deprogrammed.
• Once the desired number of ± density steps are known, the relative minimum and maximum dose
values must be determined. Typically the minimum density step will result in half (50%) of the nominal
dose and the maximum density step will typically give double the nominal dose (100% increase). The
nominal dose is the value that was recorded at 0 density in table 3D-14.
• The relative dose change per density step must be determined next. To do this, note the relative
minimum and maximum dose as determined above (i.e. 50% at min density and 100% increase at max
density), then calculate the number of - density steps and the number of + density steps that will be
required.
The relative dose change between density steps will then be the minimum density (i.e. 50) divided by
the number of density minus steps or the maximum density (i.e. 100) divided by the number of density
plus steps. This will yield the required dose increment for each density minus step and for each density
plus step respectively.
For ± 8 density steps, this gives a dose decrease of 6.25% per density minus step (8 steps x 6.25%
per step = 50% dose at -8 density) or a dose increase of 12.5% per density plus step (8 steps x 12.5%
per step = 100% dose increase at +8 density).
Refer to table 3D-15 for two typical examples of density steps vs calibration numbers. For 8 minus
density steps the dose decrease is 6.25% per step, and for 8 + density steps the dose increase is 12.5%
per step as per the example calculation above.
For 5 minus density steps the dose decrease is 10% per step, and for 5 + density steps the dose
increase is 20% per step.
DENSITY CALIBRATION NUMBER (- 8 DENSITY CALIBRATION NUMBER (- 5

STEP DENSITY = HALF THE DOSE, +8 STEP DENSITY = HALF THE DOSE, +5
DENSITY = DOUBLE THE DOSE) DENSITY = DOUBLE THE DOSE)
-8 50
-7 44
-6 38
-5 31 -5 50
-4 25 -4 40
-3 19 -3 30
-2 13 -2 20
-1 6 -1 10
0 DENSITY: SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
+1 13 +1 20
+2 25 +2 40
+3 38 +3 60
+4 50 +4 80
+5 63 +5 99
+6 75
+7 88
+8 99
Table 3D-15: Example density values
Step Action
1. Reselect FILM SCREEN 1. Replace the absorber previously used for kV breakpoint
calibration with the 1.5 mm thick copper absorber.
2. Reselect the 75 kV knee breakpoint.
3. Select << to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
4. Select DENSITY SETUP.
5. Referring to table 3D-14, note the dose at 75 kV for film screen 1. This will be referred to
as the 0 density dose.
6. Select the highest density minus step desired i.e. - 8 from the density setup menu. If it is
not intended to use this step, select the highest density minus step to be used i.e. - 5,
then set the unused steps to - to disable those steps. To disable density steps, press the
- button to scroll down until the - symbol is displayed.
7. Set the calibration number for the highest density minus step to the desired relative
density value (example 50, this will give approximately 1/2 the 0 density dose).
8. Make an exposure and confirm that the measured dose is approximately the desired
value.
9. If the measured dose is not as expected, adjust the calibration number for that density
step and repeat step 8.
10. Select the next density step (i.e. - 7) and enter the appropriate calibration number for that
step. Refer to table 3D-15 and the notes preceding table 3D-15. Repeat steps 8 and 9.
11. Repeat the previous step for each remaining density minus step. Use the >> and <<
buttons to navigate through the DENS SETUP menu in order to access all the density
steps in this procedure.
Step Action
12. Set the calibration number for the highest density plus step to the desired relative density
value (example 100, this will result in approximately double the 0 density dose).
13. Repeat step 8 and 9.
14. Select the next lowest density step (i.e. 7) and enter the appropriate calibration number
for that step. Refer to table 3D-15 and notes preceding table 3D-15. Repeat steps 8 and
9.
15. Repeat the previous step for each remaining density plus step. Use the >> and <<
buttons to navigate through the DENS SETUP menu in order to access all the density
steps.
16. When the density setup is complete and verified via dose measurements, use the <<
and EXIT buttons to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
3D.8.0 RLF COMPENSATION
The following points should be noted regarding RLF compensation. RLF compensation is normally only
needed if special techniques are used which result in AEC exposures greater than 100 ms.
• If perfect, film would provide linear density changes with linearly increasing exposure times. In reality, at
longer exposures, film effectively becomes slower. This effect is known as reciprocity law failure. To
compensate, exposure times must be increased at longer exposures.
This compensation is achieved by increasing the AEC reference voltage at longer exposure times.
RLF compensation is applied to three ranges (50-500 ms, 500-1000 ms, and 1000- 1500 ms) as shown
below.
The examples below are not meant to represent actual RLF compensation percentages in your
installation. Actual values will need to be determined per the procedure following.
• Between 0 and 50 ms no RLF compensation is applied. Per figure 3D-14, the AEC reference voltage is
constant at 1 unit between 0 and 50 ms.
• At 50 ms, RLF compensation = 10% is applied. This means that the reference voltage will increase by
10% between 50 ms and 500 ms in a linear fashion. At 500 ms the reference voltage is then 1.0 X 1.10 =
1.10 units.
20% between 500 ms and 1000 ms in a linear fashion. At 1000 ms the reference voltage is then 1.10 X
1.20 = 1.32 units.
30% between 1000 ms and 1500 ms in a linear fashion. At 1500 ms the reference voltage is then 1.32 X
1.30 = 1.72 units
• The rate of increase of the reference voltage beyond 1500 ms will be constant, up to limit of the B.U.T.
(backup timer).
• The compensation curve resulting from the RLF values described above is depicted in the graph below.
Figure 3D-14: Example RLF compensation curve
3D.8.0 RLF COMPENSATION (Cont)
The following screens are used for RLF compensation

* AEC CALIBRATION *
FILM SCREEN 2
FILM SCREEN 3
EXIT

50KV: 84.0: 85KV: 42.8
55KV: 78.0: 95KV: 38.0
65KV: 66.0: +
75KV: 54.0 -
3200MS << >>

110KV: 34.0:
130KV: 28.0:
RLF COMPENSATION +
3200MS <<
*TUBE? 0%HU LF COMP, F/S 1*

50MSEC: 0%
500MSEC: 4%
1000MSEC: 0% +
-
3200MS <<
3D.8.0 RLF COMPENSATION (Cont)
Step Action
2. Select the slowest film screen combination to compensate. This will normally be FILM
SCREEN 1.
3. Select >>.
4. Select RLF COMPENSATION.
5. From the LF COMP menu, select 50MSEC and set the value to 0 using the + or -
buttons.
6. Select mA appropriate to the film speed i.e. 100 mA for 100 speed film.
7. Make an exposure and adjust the mA if necessary to give an exposure time of
approximately 50 ms.
8. Load a test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor.
9. Make an exposure using the same techniques. Record the mAs, then develop the film.
10. Note the O.D. This should be within 10% of the O.D. that was noted during AEC
calibration.
11. Make an exposure and reduce the mA to give an exposure time of approximately 500
ms.
12. Make an exposure using the same techniques. Record the mAs.
13. Enter an RLF offset at 50MSEC to give an mAs increase of approximately 10%.
14. Load a test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Make an exposure
and develop the film.
15. If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the value in step 10, adjust the 50 ms RLF offset
value as appropriate using the + and - buttons.
16. Repeat steps 14 and 15 until the required O.D. is achieved.
17. Make an exposure and reduce the mA to give an exposure time of approximately 1000
ms.
18. Select the 500MSEC RLF adjustment and set the value to 0 using the + or - buttons.
21. Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Make an
exposure and develop the film.
22. If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the value in step 10, adjust the 500 ms RLF
offset value as appropriate using the + and - buttons.
23. Repeat steps 21 and 22 until the desired density is achieved.
THE FOLLOWING STEPS ONLY APPLY IF TECHNIQUES ARE USED RESULTING IN
AEC EXPOSURE TIMES GREATER THAN APPROXIMATELY 1500 MS.
24. Make an exposure and reduce the mA such as to give an exposure time of
approximately 1500ms.
25. Select the 1000MSEC RLF adjustment and set the value to 0 using the + or - buttons.
28. Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Make an
exposure and develop the film.
29. If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the value in step 10, adjust the 1000 ms RLF
offset value as appropriate using the + and - buttons.
30. Repeat steps 28 and 29 until the desired density is achieved.
31. Select BACK three times to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
32. Repeat steps 2 to 31 for FILM SCREEN 2 and FILM SCREEN 3 if required.
3D.9.0 MULTIPLE SPOT COMPENSATION
The following screens are used for multiple spot compensation

* AEC CALIBRATION *
FILM SCREEN 2
FILM SCREEN 3
EXIT

50KV: 84.0: 85KV: 42.8
55KV: 78.0: 95KV: 38.0
65KV: 66.0: +
75KV: 54.0 -
3200MS << >>

110KV: 34.0:
130KV: 28.0:
RLF COMPENSATION +
3200MS <<
• Multiple spot compensation may be required when doing multiple exposures on a single film. In this
mode of serial recording, the X-ray field is usually coned down to a small area. Due to the lack of scatter
and possible AEC field cutoff, an AEC density offset may be added if required. This offset is known as
multiple spot compensation.
• In order to activate the multiple spot compensation feature, the R & F table must supply a closed dry
contact when the SFD is operated in multi-spot mode. The multi-spot input to the generator is at TB5
pins 11 and 12 on the room interface board.
3D.9.0 MULTIPLE SPOT COMPENSATION (Cont)
Step Action
2. Select the slowest film screen combination to compensate. This will normally be FILM
SCREEN 1.
3. Select >>.
4. Select MULT SPOT COMP.
5. Enter the value 0% using the + and - buttons.
6. Select 85 kV via the kV + or - buttons in the radiography section of the console.
7. Select mA appropriate to the film speed per table 3D-13.
8. Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the SFD.
9. Make an exposure and record the mAs, then develop the film.
10. Verify that the film is evenly exposed, and that the O.D. is the desired value
11. Enable the SFD multi-spot function, then make several exposures and record the mAs.
12. Develop the film and record the O.D. for each exposure.
13. If the measured optical densities are not within 5% of the desired value, enter a multi-
spot compensation offset percentage that increases or decreases the mAs as
appropriate using the + and - buttons.
14. Repeat steps 8 to 13 until the desired O.D. is achieved on all exposures.
15. Select << three times to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
16. Repeat steps 2 to 15 for FILM SCREEN 2 and FILM SCREEN 3 if required.
17. Select EXIT to return to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
18. Select EXIT SETUP to return to the normal operating mode.
3D.10.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY)
Figure 3D-15: Equipment setup for wall bucky AEC calibration
Please note the following points regarding wall bucky calibration:
• If the wall bucky is dedicated to chest radiography, a focused grid with a 10:1 or 12:1 ratio should be
used along with an SID of 72 in (180 cm).
• If the wall bucky will be used for conventional as well as chest radiography, then two grids should ideally
be used. See the note at the bottom of this page.
A reasonable compromise if a single grid must be used is a 10:1 ratio, 60 in (150 cm) grid.
NOTE: SINCE MOST WALL BUCKY’S ARE USED AT 40 AND 72″ (100 AND 180 CM) SID, THE GRID
MUST BE CHOSEN WITH CARE WITH RESPECT TO CUT-OFF. A TYPICAL GRID WILL HAVE
AN 8:1 RATIO, WITH 85 LINE PAIR/INCH OR 10:1 RATIO WITH 150 LINE PAIR/INCH
(STATIONARY). TYPICALLY, 400 SPEED FILM SCREEN WILL BE USED WITH 90 SECOND
PROCESSING.
3D.10.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY) Cont
Grid Absorption
The following information may aid in selecting a grid and/or estimating doses in front of the bucky if required: The
percentages listed are approximate.
∗ A 10:1 ratio 60 in (150 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in (13 cm)
from center: At 72 in (180 cm) absorption = 18%
At 40 in (100 cm) absorption = 40%
At 40 in (100 cm) absorption = 50%
NOTE: BREAKPOINT CALIBRATIONS MAY HAVE BEEN DONE FOR ALL THREE FILM SCREEN
COMBINATIONS DURING TABLE BUCKY AEC CALIBRATION. IF SO, THE REMAINING
IMAGE RECEPTORS MUST USE THE CALIBRATION CURVES PREVIOUSLY ESTABLISHED
FOR THOSE FILM SCREENS.
IF AN UNUSED FILM SCREEN COMBINATION IS AVAILABLE FOR WALL BUCKY
USE, IT IS SUGGESTED THAT TWO RECEPTOR SELECTOR BUTTONS ON THE CONSOLE
BE ASSIGNED TO SELECT THE WALL BUCKY. THE FIRST WALL BUCKY SELECTOR
SHOULD BE USED FOR 40″ (100 CM) SID’S WITH THE APPROPRIATE PREVIOUSLY
CALIBRATED FILM SCREEN. THE SECOND WALL BUCKY SELECTOR SHOULD THEN BE
USED WITH THE PREVIOUSLY UNCALIBRATED FILM SCREEN AT 72″ (180 CM) SID’S.
THIS METHOD WILL ALLOW THE GRID TO BE OPTIMIZED FOR EACH SID, AS A
SEPARATE DEDICATED FILM SCREEN WITH ITS OWN CALIBRATION CURVE CAN BE
ASSIGNED TO THE 72″ (180CM) SID.
Step Action
USE OF ONE FILM SCREEN FOR BOTH SID’S USING PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED
FILM SCREENS
1. Set up the X-ray tube stand as shown in figure 3D-15.
2. Align the tube stand and wall bucky such that the central ray is centered relative to the
image receptor.
3. Open up the collimator to expose all three fields of the AEC pickup. Ensure that the
central ray remains centered relative to the image receptor.
4. Place the R probe at the film plane, i.e. behind the grid. If this cannot be done, then
attach the probe to the front of the bucky. Ensure that the R-probe is located directly
under the central ray. The R meter must be set to measure in the micro-R range.
6. Select the wall bucky image receptor.
7. Select the slowest film screen used for the wall bucky, then select the appropriate mA for
that film screen per table 3D-13 (example 320 mA for 100 speed film). Select 75 kV,
large focus, center field.
8. Make an exposure and note the dose and mAs.
9. Referring to table 3D-14, select the previously established dose required at the 75 kV
knee breakpoint for the film speed being calibrated.
Note that the dose values in the table are based on a specific R-probe placement
during table bucky calibration (either at the film plane, or alternately in front of the
bucky). If the probe placement for wall bucky calibration is not the same as it was
for table bucky calibration, use the estimated dose correction factor in this
subsection under GRID ABSORPTION.
10. Adjust the required gain potentiometer on the AEC board (see note below) while taking
exposures until the dose noted in the previous step is obtained.
• CHANNEL 2 ON THE AEC BOARD IS TYPICALLY USED FOR THE WALL
BUCKY AEC CHAMBER. YOUR INSTALLATION MAY USE A DIFFERENT
CHANNEL ON THE AEC BOARD. DO NOT READJUST THE GAIN POT FOR
THE CHANNEL THAT WAS PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED (FOR TABLE BUCKY).
• REFER TO TABLE 3D-10 FOR THE AEC BOARD GAIN POTENTIOMETER
(GAIN POT) DESIGNATIONS FOR THE VARIOUS AEC BOARDS.
11. Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Using the same
technique, expose the film and develop it.
12. Measure the O.D. The desired value should have been previously recorded in a copy of
table 3D-1.
13. If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the desired value, adjust the gain pot (as per
step 10) to increase or decrease the density, then repeat the previous two steps.
14. Change the SID to 40″ (100 CM) and repeat steps 11 to 13. Adjust the gain pot if
necessary to achieve an acceptable compromise between both SID’s.
14. Verify the O.D. at a range of different kV’s.
USE OF TWO FILM SCREENS (ONE FOR EACH SID) USING ONE PREVIOUSLY
CALIBRATED FILM SCREEN AND ONE UNCALIBRATED FILM SCREEN
15. Select the wall bucky image receptor via the selector configured for the 40″ (100 CM)
SID.
16. Repeat steps 1 to 13 at the 40″ (100 CM) SID position using the appropriate previously
calibrated film screen.
Step Action
17. Verify the O.D. at a range of different kV’s.
18. Switch the generator OFF. Re-enter the programming mode as detailed in the TABLE
BUCKY AEC calibration section.
19. Select the wall bucky image receptor via the selector configured for the 72″ (180 CM)
SID.
20. Calibrate the film screen assigned to this SID as per the table bucky procedure. The
calibration pot is NOT to be adjusted during this procedure (this was calibrated in the
preceding procedure). All breakpoints, including the 75 kV knee breakpoint, are to be
calibrated by adjusting the calibration numbers ONLY.
21. When complete, exit the AEC CALIBRATION and GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
3D.11.0 AEC CALIBRATION (AUX, SFD, ETC)
The remaining image receptors are calibrated in a similar manner to the table bucky receptor. Only the gain
pot for that channel is to be adjusted at the slowest film screen used on that receptor. DO NOT READJUST
THE GAIN POT FOR PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED RECEPTORS, AND DO NOT READJUST THE
CALIBRATION VALUES IN THE AEC CALIBRATION MENU FOR PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED FILM
SCREENS.
Refer to 3D.2.9 if a PMT is to be used for AEC during digital acquisition or spot film work.
THE MEMORY SETTING THAT WAS TEMPORARILY CHANGED TO OFF IN SECTION 3D.5.0 STEP 11
MAY NOW BE RESET TO THE DESIRED VALUE.
CPI Canada Inc. ABS Calibration 3E
CHAPTER 3
SECTION 3E
ABS CALIBRATION
CONTENTS:
3E.1.0 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................... 3E-2

3E.1.1 Overview of ABS Operation ................................................................................................................... 3E-2
3E.1.2 Image Intensifier Light Output ................................................................................................................ 3E-3
3E.1.3 ABS Pickup Devices .............................................................................................................................. 3E-4
3E.1.4 Required Test Equipment ...................................................................................................................... 3E-5
3E.1.5 Absorber Equivalents............................................................................................................................. 3E-5
3E.2.0 ABS PICKUP INSTALLATION/WIRING .................................................................................................... 3E-6
3E.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 3E-6
3E.2.2 ABS Jumper Matrix. ............................................................................................................................... 3E-7
3E.2.3 PMT (Photo Multiplier Tube) .................................................................................................................. 3E-8
3E.2.4 Photo Diode ........................................................................................................................................... 3E-8
3E.2.5 DC Proportional...................................................................................................................................... 3E-9
3E.2.6 Composite Video.................................................................................................................................... 3E-9
3E.3.0 ABS SETUP............................................................................................................................................. 3E-10
3E.3.1 Dose Limits .......................................................................................................................................... 3E-10
3E.3.2 ABS Defaults........................................................................................................................................ 3E-15
3E.3.3 I.I. Input Dose Calibration..................................................................................................................... 3E-18
3E.3.4 Dose1/Dose2 Calibration ..................................................................................................................... 3E-21
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-07 Rev. D Page 3E-1
3E ABS Calibration CPI Canada Inc.
3E.1.0 INTRODUCTION
3E.1.1 Overview of ABS Operation
Refer to figure 3E-1, this is a block diagram of the ABS system.

X-rays pass through the patient and excite the input cesium phosphor of the image intensifier
(I.I.). This will cause the output of the I.I. to fluoresce and project the image to the TV camera via the
collimating lens. A sample of the light output is then sensed by a photodiode or photomultiplier tube
(PMT), or composite or proportional video will be fed back from the camera.
The feedback signal is processed by the ABS circuits on the generator interface board. The result,
regardless of the type of ABS sensor used, will be a DC voltage proportional to the brightness of the
image. This DC signal is then processed by the generator CPU board. The CPU compares the feedback
voltage with a reference value determined by dose rate, mA, kVp, and mA ranges set during ABS
calibration. The CPU will attempt to maintain constant image brightness by varying the kVp and/or mA
output of the HF power supply according to a predetermined algorithm.
Figure 3E-1: ABS block diagram
Page 3E-2 Rev. D Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-07
3E.1.2 Image Intensifier Light Output
The following variables affect the transmitted light output of an I.I. tube.
• Image Intensifier gain.

• Field size - input to output.
• System components.
• Choice of X-ray techniques.
Image Intensifier Gain.
Image tube gain is affected by two different factors, the ratio of the input to output phosphor area and the
electron gain due to the electron acceleration from the cathode to anode. A third effect that slowly reduces
the I.I. tube’s gain is age. The emissivity of the cesium cathode decays with time and usage.
Gain = Area of input divided by the area of the output multiplied by the energy of a photon
(E = hc/λ [where h = Plank’s constant, c = speed of light and λ is the light wavelength])
Example: Consider the difference of I.I. tube gain when a 12 inch I.I. tube is switched between 6 inches
and 12 inches.
Gain with tube in NORMAL mode: Gain with tube in the MAG mode:
Gain =(6 X 6 X π)/(.5 X .5 x π) = 144 X E Gain =(3 X 3 X π)/(.5 X .5 x π) = 36 X E
Field Size - Input to Output.
Most modern I.I. tubes are the multi-mode type where the effective input area may be changed per the
nature of the procedure. To change the field size of an I.I. tube when a MAG mode is selected, the
electron beam over-scans the output target. This in effect reduces the ratio of input size to output size and
reduces the gain or light output of the I.I. tube.
Figure 3E-2: I.I. input and output area
3E.1.3 ABS Pickup Devices
Shown below are pictorial representations of the three basic types of light sensors which generate the
DC reference signal used by the generator. These are simplified schematics only, refer to section 3E-
2.0. for actual wiring of the ABS pickup device.
Photo-multiplier tube
Photo Diode
Composite Video or Proportional DC
Figure 3E-3: ABS Pickup Devices
3E.1.4 Required Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required for ABS calibration.
• Resolution test pattern for imaging focusing.

• Central ray alignment fixture.
• Collimator centering test pattern.
• A selection of Al filters for HVL determination.
• A selection of body absorbers such as sheets of pure copper (1.0 to 7.5 mm). Refer to table 3E-1 for
equivalent thickness of various absorbers.
3E.1.5 Absorber Equivalents
Table 3E-1 shows the absorption equivalency for copper, water and aluminum. These values are based
on 75 kVp.
Cu (mm/in) Water (cm/in) Al 1100 (cm/in)

0.5 / .020 7.6 / 3.0 1.27 / 0.5
1.0 / .039 15.2 / 6.0 2.54 / 1.0
2.0 / .079 30.5 / 12.0 5.33 / 2.1
3.0 / .118 45.8 / 18.0 7.87 / 3.1
4.0 / .157 * *
5.0 / .196 * *
6.0 / .236 * *
7.0 / .276 * *
8.0 / .315 * *
Table 3E-1: Equivalent thickness of various absorbers
* = Water/aluminum thickness at these values too great to be practical.
3E.2.0 ABS PICKUP INSTALLATION/WIRING
Sections 3E.1.3 and 3E.2.1 present an overview of the various ABS pickup types that may be used with
the Millenia and Indico 100 family of generators. The generator must be specifically configured to accept
each pickup type as per table 3E-2 and sections 3E.2.3, 3E.2.4, 3E.2.5 and 3E.2.6.
PLEASE NOTE THAT THE GENERATOR IS FACTORY CONFIGURED FOR ONE SPECIFIC
TYPE OF ABS PICKUP ONLY. REFER TO THE CUSTOMER PRODUCT DESCRIPTION FORM IN
CHAPTER 1 SECTION D FOR THE FACTORY CONFIGURED ABS COMPATIBILITY OF THIS
GENERATOR.
3E.2.1 Overview
The generator has been factory configured to to be compatible with one of the following ABS pickup types.
Field reconfiguration to accept other ABS pickup types, listed below, is possible if required.
• PMT (photo multiplier tube).

• Light sensitive optical diode. The output may be 0 to +5 VDC, 0 to -5 VDC, or +/- VDC centered at 0
VDC.
• A proportional (to the brightness of the I.I) DC voltage. The output polarity may be 0 to +5 VDC or 0 to
-5 VDC.
• A terminated or non terminated composite video signal.
Refer to chapter 1E for the AEC board and generator interface board location in your generator.
Figure 3E-4: ABS interface to the generator (overview)
3E.2.2 ABS Jumper Matrix.
The table below details the generator interface board jumper positions as required to be compatible with
the listed ABS pickups. Refer to the generator interface board schematic 732175 sheet 2 in conjunction
with this table. This table should be used in conjunction with sections 3E.2.3, 3E.2.4 3E.2.5, and 3E.2.6.
ABS PICKUP TYPE GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD INPUTS & JUMPER CONFIGURATIONS
INPUT JW4 JW5 JW11 JW12 JW13 JW19 JW20 JW21
Photo Multiplier Tube J7 OUT PINS OUT OUT PINS

* 1-2 * * 2-3
Photo Multiplier Tube J8 OUT PINS OUT OUT PINS IN PINS
* 1-2 1-2 2-3
Photo Diode J7 OUT PINS OUT OUT PINS
(negative output) * 1-2 * * 2-3
(positive output) * 2-3 * * 2-3
0-5 VDC neg/pos * 2-3 * * 2-3
Proportional DC J7 OUT PINS OUT OUT PINS
0-5 VDC positive * 2-3 * * 2-3
Proportional DC J8 OUT PINS OUT OUT PINS OUT PINS
0-5 VDC positive * 2-3 1-2 2-3
Proportional DC J7 OUT PINS OUT OUT PINS
0-5 VDC negative * 1-2 * * 2-3
Proportional DC J8 OUT PINS OUT OUT PINS OUT PINS
0-5 VDC negative * 1-2 1-2 2-3
Composite video J8 OUT IN PINS OUT IN PINS IN PINS
terminated 75 Ω 3-4 2-3 2-3
Composite video J8 IN OUT PINS OUT IN PINS IN PINS
high impedance 3-4 2-3 2-3
Via optional Via OUT PINS
expansion board in J13 * * * * * * 1-2
digital system
* = Don’t care i.e. jumper may be in any position
NOTE: TABLE 3E-2 INDICATES THE OPTION OF CONNECTING THE OUTPUTS FROM A PMT OR
PROPORTIONAL DC TO J8 INSTEAD OF J7. THIS ALTERNATE CONNECTION IS NOT SHOWN IN THE
SIMPLIFIED PICTORIAL DIAGRAMS 3E-3 OR 3E-4.
Table 3E-2: ABS jumper matrix
WARNING: SWITCH OFF THE GENERATOR AND ENSURE THAT ALL CAPACITORS ARE
DISCHARGED BEFORE CONNECTING ANY ABS PICKUP DEVICES
3E.2.3 PMT (Photo Multiplier Tube)
NOTE: The generator must be fitted with the “Universal AEC Board” assembly if using a PMT. The high
voltage supply for the PMT is located on this assembly.
1. Dress the PMT cable from the imaging system such as to allow the dynode high voltage lead to plug
into the “universal AEC interface board” at J7. Refer to figure 3E-4. J7 is the high voltage output for
the PMT, all pins on this connector are connected in parallel and thus any of the 4 pins on J7 may be
used. Ensure that the high voltage lead is rated at 1000 VDC minimum.
NOTE: The total resistive load of all dynodes must be greater than 1 megohm to prevent excess PMT
power supply loading.
2. Dress the signal (coax) cable from the PMT to allow it to connect to J7 on the generator interface
board. Wire to J7 as per figure 3E-3. Alternately, the PMT output may be connected to BNC connector
J8 on the generator interface board.
3. Ensure that there is sufficient slack in the cables such that the cabinet door does not strain these
cables when opening and closing. Secure the cables in place such as to prevent mechanical stress on
the connections.
4. The signal ground must be at the generator interface board only to avoid ground loops.
5. Position the jumpers on the generator interface board as per table 3E-2 for Photo Multiplier Tube,
selecting the correct configuration depending on whether the input is at J7 or J8.
6. The PMT high voltage calibration will be done at a later step.
3E.2.4 Photo Diode
1. Dress the signal cable from the photo diode circuit to allow it to connect to J7 on the generator
interface board. Connect the photodiode to J7 as follows: Output signal to pin 12, ground to pin 7, +12
VDC to pin 4, and -12 VDC if used to pin 5.
2. Ensure that there is sufficient slack in the cable such that the cabinet door does not strain this cable
when opening and closing. Secure the cables in place such as to prevent mechanical stress on the
connections.
3. Note that there are three types of photo diodes for this application with outputs as listed below:
• a zero to positive DC voltage for increasing light flux

• a zero to negative DC voltage for increasing light flux
• a negative DC voltage to positive DC voltage for increasing light flux. The required dose is set for
0 volts. The output will be negative for reduced light due to increased patient absorption, then
swinging positive for increased light due to reduced patient absorption.
4. Position the jumpers on the generator interface board as per table 3E-2 for Photo Diode. Please
ensure that the correct configuration is selected per your photo diode type as detailed above.
3E.2.5 DC Proportional
1. Dress the signal cable from the camera to allow it to connect to J7 on the generator interface board.
Wire to J7 as per figure 3E-3. Alternately, the DC proportional signal output may be connected to BNC
connector J8 on the generator interface board.
when opening and closing. Secure the cable in place such as to prevent mechanical stress on the
connections.
3. Position the jumpers on the generator interface board as per table 3E-2 for Proportional DC,
selecting the correct configuration depending on whether the input is at J7 or J8 and whether the
polarity is negative or positive.
3E.2.6 Composite Video
1. Dress the composite video output from the camera to allow it to connect to J8 on the generator
interface board.
when opening and closing. Secure the cable in place such as to prevent mechanical stress on the
terminations.
3. Position the jumpers on the generator interface board as per table 3E-2 for Composite Video,
selecting the correct configuration depending on whether the video is 75 Ω terminated or high
impedance (it must be determined beforehand whether the 75 Ω termination must be made at the
generator).
3E.3.0 ABS SETUP
Before the ABS system can be calibrated, the imaging system must be functional and properly set up.
Please verify the following:
• Image intensifier and its power supply are functional.

• TV camera calibrated for this application.
• All beam attenuating devices are in place.
• Table top is in position.
• Fluoro grid is in path of X-ray beam.
• Imaging system is in the operational position.
• Imaging collimator functional.
• Collimator opening varies as S.I.D. is changed. (S.I.D. = source-image distance)
• Collimator opening varies as the image intensifier’s MAG mode switch is changed.
• The ABS pickup device (as per the previous section) must be installed and functional.
• Sufficient filters are added to the X-ray tube to provide the required HVL.
• The fluoro imaging and receptor devices have been programmed. Reference chapter-3, section C
• kVp and mA must be in calibration. Reference chapter-4
CAUTION: PROCEDURES IN THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS REQUIRE THE PRODUCTION OF X-RAYS.

IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE INSTALLER TO FOLLOW ESTABLISHED GUIDELINES
TO PROTECT ALL PERSONNEL FROM RADIATION EXPOSURE.
3E.3.1 Dose Limits
This procedure sets the maximum kV allowed for each mA step in both manual and ABS mode of
operation.
CAUTION: MAXIMUM INPUT DOSE VALUE IS USUALLY GOVERNED BY LOCAL, STATE OR COUNTRY
REGULATIONS. THESE LIMITS MUST BE DETERMINED IN ADVANCE OF ATTEMPTING
DOSE LIMITS SETUP, AND ADHERED TO DURING GENERATOR CALIBRATION.
NOTE: REFER TO LOCAL REGULATIONS TO DETERMINE THE REQUIRED DISTANCE BETWEEN

THE FOCAL SPOT AND RADIATION DETECTOR. THIS FOCAL SPOT TO DETECTOR
DISTANCE MUST BE USED WHEN SETTING UP THE RADIATION DETECTOR FOR DOSE
LIMITS CALIBRATION.
3E.3.1 Dose Limits (Cont)
Figure 3E-5: Dose limits test setup
* GENERATOR SETUP *
GEN CONFIGURATION
DATA LINK
EXIT SETUP
* GEN CONFIGURATION *
TUBE SELECTION AEC SETUP
GENERATOR LIMITS AEC CALIBRATION
RECEPTOR SETUP FLUORO SETUP
I/O CONFIGURATION TUBE CALIBRATION
EXIT
TUBE1 0%HU FLUORO SETUP* MAG:0

DOSE LIMITS I/I MODES: 2
ABS SETUP FL-RAD KV XFER: 6
MIN FLUORO KV: 50 +
-
EXIT >> DOSE:0
TUBE1 0%HU *ABS SETUP* MAG:0

LOOP GAIN 60 AUTO MA/KV CURVE: 0
NOMINAL DOSE 80 ABS CHANNEL: 5
DOSE 1: 100 +
DOSE 2: 100 -
<< DOSE:0
Use these steps to set the DOSE LIMITS.

Step Action
1. Set up the radiation probe as per figure 3E-5 in the position indicated Max. Patient
Input Dose. Refer to the note on page 10 re focal spot to radiation probe distance. No
absorber is required at this point in the setup.
2. Temporarily unplug the ABS pickup at J7 or J8 of the generator interface board.
3. Temporarily de-energize the I.I. power supply, or cover the I.I. with approximately 1/16″
(1.6 mm) lead.
4. Enter into the generator programming mode. Refer to chapter 3C, section 3C.1.1.
5. From the GENERATOR SETUP menu select GEN CONFIGURATION.
6. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu select FLUORO SETUP.
7. Select ABS SETUP. Select AUTO MA/KV CURVE, then use the + or - buttons to
select auto mA/kV curve 1.
8. Select << to return to the FLUORO SETUP menu.
TUBE1 0%HU DOSE LIM. - ABS* MAG:0

1.0 MA: 125KV 5.0 MA: 125KV
2.0 MA: 125KV 6.0 MA: 125KV
3.0 MA: 125KV +
4.0 MA: 125KV -
<< >> DOSE:0
TUBE1 0%HU DOSE LIM. - MAN* MAG:0

1.0 MA: 125KV 5.0 MA: 125KV
2.0 MA: 125KV 6.0 MA: 125KV
3.0 MA: 125KV +
4.0 MA: 125KV -
<< RETURDOSE:0
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT COPIES BE MADE OF ALL PAGES WHERE RESULTS ARE TO BE

RECORDED. THE RESULTS SHOULD THEN BE RECORDED ON THE COPIES, LEAVING THE ORIGINALS
BLANK.
Step Action Result

1. Record the maximum permissible input Maximum permitted input dose:
dose values for ABS and non-ABS
(manual) modes of fluoroscopy as per ABS mode:______________ R/Min
local regulations.
Non ABS mode:__________ R/Min
2. From the FLUORO SETUP menu, select The DOSE LIM. - ABS menu will be
DOSE LIMITS. displayed.
3. From the DOSE LIM - ABS menu, select The DOSE LIM. - MAN menu will be
>>. displayed.
4. Ensure that the ABS function is switched The LED adjacent to the ABS button will
OFF. The ABS button is located at the be off.
bottom of the FLUOROSCOPY section of
the console.
5. Set the default kV for each mA station in
the DOSE LIM - MAN menu to the
maximum permissible value (110 or 125
kV) as per local regulations.
6. Select the 6.0 MA dose limit step in the
LCD display window. Enter the value 6.0
mA in the fluoro control section of the
console.
7. While observing the dosimeter, make a
fluoroscopy exposure. Adjust the kV via
the fluoro section of the console such that
the maximum permitted dose as recorded
in step 1 for ABS mode is not exceeded.
8. Record the kV value as determined in step Max kV limit for 6.0 mA = ______(ABS)
7 for the 6.0 mA step.
9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 for 5.0 mA. Max kV limit for 5.0 mA = ______(ABS)
The following steps set up the non-ABS kV limits (manual mode).

Step Action Result
1. Reselect the 6.0 MA dose limit step in the
LCD display window. Enter the value 6.0
mA in the fluoro control section of the
console.
2. While observing the dosimeter, make a
fluoroscopy exposure. Adjust the kV via
the fluoro section of the console such that
the maximum permitted dose as recorded
in step 1 (page 13) for non-ABS mode is
not exceeded.
3. Record the kV value as determined in step Max kV limit for 6.0 mA = ______(MAN)
2 for the 6.0 mA step.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for 5.0 mA. Max kV limit for 5.0 mA = ______(MAN
8. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for 1.0 mA. Max kV limit for 1.0 mA = ______(MAN)
9. Enter the kV limit for non-ABS mode as

recorded in step 3 above (for the 6.0 mA
station) into the 6.0 mA dose limit step in
the LCD display.
Select the 6.0 mA step in the
DOSE LIM - MAN menu, then enter the
required kV value using the + or - buttons
10. Repeat step 9 for the 5.0 mA to 1.0 mA
stations (non-ABS kV limits).
11. Select << to return to the DOSE LIM-ABS

menu.
12. Enter the kV limit for ABS mode as
recorded in step 8 (page 14) for the 6.0 mA
station into the 6.0 mA dose limit step in
the the LCD display.
Select the 6.0 mA step in the
DOSE LIM - ABS menu, then enter the
required kV value using the + or - buttons
13. Repeat step 12 for the 5.0 to 1.0 mA
stations (ABS kV limits)..
14. Select << to return to the FLUORO SETUP
menu.
3E.3.2 ABS Defaults

DOSE LIMITS I/I MODES: 2
ABS SETUP FL-RAD KV XFER: 6
MIN FLUORO KV: 50 +
-
EXIT >> DOSE:0
Step Action
1. From the FLUORO SETUP menu select MIN FLUORO KV. Press the + or - buttons
to select the minimum kV to be allowed in fluoro.
2. Select I/I MODES. Press the + or - buttons to select the number of mag modes in the
I.I. (2 corresponds to 2 mag modes plus normal mode).
3. Select FL-RAD KV XFER. Press the + or - buttons to select the desired fluoro-rad kV
transfer curve.
This allows selection of one-of-six fluoro to rad kV transfer curves. When in fluoro
operation with ABS on, the fluoro kV value is transferred to the RADIOGRAPHY
section of the console at the end of the fluoro exposure. This presets the rad kV in
preparation for a rapid follow-on radiographic exposure for digital acquisition or spot
film work.
Graphs of the fluoro kV to rad kV transfer function are shown following this step.
Selecting 0 disables this function.
3E.3.2 ABS Defaults (Cont)
Curve 1 Curve 2
150 150
140 140
R 130 R 130
A 120 A 120
110 110
D 100 D 100
90 90
k 80 k 80
70 70
V 60 V 60
50 50
40 40
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
FLUORO kV FLUORO kV
Curve 3 Curve 4
150 150
140 140
R 130 R 130
A 120 A 120
110 110
D 100 D 100
90 90
80 80
k 70 k 70
V 60 V 60
50 50
40 40
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
FLUORO kV FLUORO kV
Curve 5 Curve 6
150 150
140 140
R 130 R 130
A 120 A 120
110 110
D 100 D 100
90 90
80 80
k 70 k 70
V 60 V 60
50 50
40 40
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
FLUORO kV FLUORO kV

ABS DEFAULT: OFF
FL TIMER MODE: 10MIN
<< DOSE:0
Step Action
1. From the FLUORO SETUP menu select >>. The above menu will display.
2. Select ABS DEFAULT. Toggle to select NONE, OFF, or ABS.
NONE: No default selected, ABS remains at its last setting.

OFF: Defaults to ABS OFF.
ABS: Defaults to ABS ON.
3. Select FL TIMER MODE. Toggle to select 5MIN or 10MIN.
5MIN: Alarms at 5.0 minutes, and stops incrementing the timer. Fluoro exposures will
continue.
10MIN: Alarms at 5.0 minutes, stops incrementing the timer at 9.6 minutes. Fluoro
exposures will be inhibited at 9.6 minutes.
4. Select << to return to the FLUORO SETUP menu.
5. Select ABS SETUP. The ABS SETUP menu will display as shown below.
6. Select ABS CHANNEL. This selects the hardware ABS input. This must be set to 5.
7. Select AUTO MA/KV CURVE. Press the + or - buttons to select the desired fluoro
mA/kV curve.
This sets how the kV and mA change during ABS operation.
0: Changes kV only (mA set manually).

1: kV linear mA.
2: mA leading kV.
3: kV leading mA #1.
4: kV leading mA #2 (reduced dose).
Refer to the graph of these curves as shown on the next page.
TUBE1 0%HU *ABS SETUP* MAG:0

LOOP GAIN 60 AUTO MA/KV CURVE: 0
NOMINAL DOSE 80 ABS CHANNEL: 5
DOSE 1: 100 +
DOSE 2: 100 -
<< DOSE:0
ABS mA/kV CURVES

4.5
4
3.5
3 kV linear mA
M 2.5 mA leading kV
A 2 kV leading mA #1
1.5
kV leading mA #2
1
0.5
0
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
KV
3E.3.3 I.I. Input Dose Calibration
This procedure sets the actual operating input dose to the I.I. Please note the following:
• Ensure that the collimator is adjusted to only expose the I.I. input.
• The central ray from the X-ray tube must coincide with the center of the I.I.
• The required I.I. input dose must be known before proceeding. Typical values (for reference only) are:
⇒ 6 inch (15 cm) I.I. = 8.1 mR/min.
⇒ 9 inch (23 cm) I.I. = 3.6 mR/min.
⇒ 12 inch (30 cm) I.I = 2.0 mR/min
3E.3.3 I.I. Input Dose Calibration (Cont)
Figure 3E-6: PMT high voltage adjustment (AEC interface board)
• R10 adjusts the PMT high voltage during ABS operation. Refer to 3E.3.3.
• R19 and R24 adjust the ion chamber bias voltage and PMT high voltage during AEC operation. Refer
to chapter 3D for further details.
Use these steps to set the input dose to the I.I.

Step Action
1. Reconnect the ABS pickup plug that was temporarily disconnected from J7 or J8 of
the generator interface board in an earlier step.
2. Re-energize the I.I. power supply or remove the lead that was temporarily installed in
an earlier step.
3. Set up the radiation probe as per figure 3E-5 in the position indicated I.I. Input Dose.
This must be able to read dose values as low as 2 to 3 mR/min.
4. Set up the absorber as shown in the above figure. 1 1/2” (40mm) of aluminum is
recommended, refer to table 3E-1 if aluminum is unavailable. Ensure that the absorber
covers the full input field of the I.I.
5. Select 75kV and 1.5 mA. Ensure that the ABS is off.
6. Ensure that the I.I. is in the NORMAL mode (MAG = 0). Ensure that an anti-scatter
grid, if used, is properly installed.
7. Make a fluoro exposure and measure the I.I. input dose.
8. Adjust the fluoro kV to achieve the desired input dose.
9. Connect a DVM or ‘scope to TP8 and ground of the generator interface board.
10. Adjust R48 on the generator interface board to achieve 2.0 VDC at the test points
connected to in the previous step.
11. From the ABS SETUP menu, select LOOP GAIN. Press the + or - buttons to select
the initial value of 25.
This controls the speed at which the ABS corrects the dose. Fast pickups such as a
PMT will typically require a value of 25 to 40, slower pickups such as video or
proportional DC will require a higher value. This is initially set to 25, and may need to
be readjusted to prevent slow response or instability when operating in ABS mode.
ENSURE THAT THE DOSE IS SET TO 0 ON THE CONSOLE.
12. From the ABS SETUP menu, select NOMINAL DOSE. Press the + or - buttons to
select a value of 200.
13. Switch the ABS ON. The LED adjacent to the ABS switch at the bottom of the
FLUOROSCOPY section of the console will light.
NOTE: STEPS 14 TO 16 APPLY ONLY IF USING A PMT. IGNORE THESE STEPS
FOR OTHER ABS PICKUP DEVICES
WARNING: SWITCH OFF THE GENERATOR AND ENSURE THAT ALL

CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED BEFORE MAKING AND REMOVING THE PMT
CURRENT MEASURING EQUIPMENT
14. Connect a microammeter in series with the PMT signal output. Alternately, if a
microammeter is not available, follow this procedure:
• Temporarily connect a resistor of known value (100K is suggested) from either
end of R61 on the generator interface board to ground. A DVM can then be used
to measure the voltage developed by the PMT current across this resistor.
However, this is not the preferred method of measurement.
15. Adjust the PMT high voltage using R10 (refer to figure 3E-6) on the AEC interface
board while pressing the fluoro footswitch such that the PMT current is 20 ± 5 uA at
the desired I.I. input dose. This corresponds to a voltage of 2.00 ± 0.50 VDC for a
100K resistor if using the voltmeter method in the above step. The high voltage should
be approximately -750 VDC at this point.
The PMT high voltage is adjusted to yield the PMT current noted in this step. The
approximate value of PMT voltage is stated for reference only. The PMT voltage does
not normally need to be measured in this step, however, if it is desired to do so for
troubleshooting purposes please note the following:
USE TP5 ONLY ON THE AEC INTERFACE BOARD FOR THE HV METER
GROUND WHEN MEASURING PMT HIGH VOLTAGE. CONNECT THE GROUND
FIRST BEFORE MEASURING THE HIGH VOLTAGE. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
MEASURE THIS WITHOUT A SUITABLE METER.
16. Disconnect the meter (and resistor if applicable) that was was connected in step 9.
Reconnect the PMT signal lead if required.
17. Initiate fluoro operation and measure the input dose to the I.I. If this value is not as
desired adjust the NOMINAL DOSE using the + or - buttons as required. Record this
value in step 1 of 3E.3.4.
3E.3.4 Dose1/Dose2 Calibration
Use these steps to calibrate dose 1 and dose 2.

Step Action Result
1. Before continuing, record the NOMINAL
DOSE value as determined in the previous Nominal Dose (cal value): _______
section.
2. Record the desired dose 1 and dose 2 Desired dose values:
input values.
Dose 1:______________ mR/Min
Dose 2:______________ mR/Min
3. Initiate fluoro operation and measure the

input dose to the I.I. Adjust to the desired
dose 1 value by altering the NOMINAL
DOSE value as required using the + or -
buttons.
4. When the desired dose 1 value has been
achieved, enter the new NOMINAL DOSE
value in the DOSE 1 location using the +
or - buttons.
5. Initiate fluoro operation and measure the
input dose to the I.I. Adjust to the desired
dose 2 value by altering the NOMINAL
DOSE value as required using the + or -
buttons.
6. When the desired dose 2 value has been
achieved, enter the new NOMINAL DOSE
value in the DOSE 2 location using the +
or - buttons.
3E.3.4 Dose1/Dose2 Calibration (Cont)
7. Reset the original NOMINAL DOSE value

by entering the value recorded in step 1 of
this table into the NOMINAL DOSE
location using the + or - buttons.
8. Verify each dose (nominal, dose 1, and
dose 2) by initiating fluoro operation and
measuring the I.I. input dose.
9. Press <<, then EXIT to exit out of
FLUORO SETUP mode. Press EXIT, then
EXIT SETUP to return to the normal
operating mode.
This completes the fluoro calibration.
CPI Canada Inc. Acceptance Testing 4
CHAPTER 4
ACCEPTANCE TESTING
CONTENTS:
4.1.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2.0 REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT FOR GENERATOR VERIFICATION. ....................................................... 4-2
4.3.0 CONSOLE OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................. 4-3
4.4.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (BASIC FUNCTIONS) ............................................................................................. 4-4
4.4.1 Console Rad Tests..................................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.4.2 Console Fluoro Tests ................................................................................................................................. 4-5
4.4.3 Generator Preliminary Tests ...................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.4.4 Low Speed Starter Verification ................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.4.5 Dual Speed Starter Verification .................................................................................................................. 4-8
4.5.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (KVP, TIME, MA AND MAS).................................................................................... 4-9
4.5.1 Generator Rad Tests.................................................................................................................................. 4-9
4.5.2 Generator Fluoro Tests ............................................................................................................................ 4-13
4.6.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (OPTIONAL INTERFACES) .................................................................................. 4-15
4.7.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (AEC) ..................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.8.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (ABS) ..................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.9.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (HVL, LINEARITY AND REPRODUCIBILITY) ...................................................... 4-16
4.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This section details acceptance testing, which verifies that the generator is performing within limits. It is
recommended that this be done whenever the generator is reconfigured, or component(s) are replaced
which may affect the X-ray output. Examples of such components are the X-ray tube, HT tank, generator
CPU board, generator interface board, AEC board, control board 1 and control board 2 in the HF power
supply, and the filament supply board(s).
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-08 Rev. F Page 4-1
4 Acceptance Testing CPI Canada Inc.
WARNING: 1. USE EXTREME CARE IN MEASURING HIGH VOLTAGES. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT MAY
CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH.
2. EVEN WITH THE GENERATOR SWITCHED OFF AT THE CONSOLE, (OR THE LOCKOUT
SWITCH INSIDE THE MAIN CABINET LOCKED OUT), MAINS VOLTAGE IS STILL
PRESENT INSIDE THE GENERATOR CABINET. THIS VOLTAGE IS EXTREMELY
DANGEROUS, USE EXTREME CAUTION.
3. THE ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS, LOCATED ON THE BASE OF THE HF POWER
SUPPLY, PRESENT A HAZARD FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES AFTER THE POWER
HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF. VERIFY THAT THESE CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED
BEFORE SERVICING OR TOUCHING ANY PARTS.
WARNING: THE PROCEDURES IN THIS CHAPTER REQUIRE THE PRODUCTION OF X-RAYS. TAKE
ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM X-RADIATION.
WARNING: 1. ALWAYS ENSURE THAT THE EQUIPMENT UNDER TEST AND ALL ASSOCIATED TEST
EQUIPMENT IS PROPERLY GROUNDED
2. ENSURE THAT THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES ARE INTACT/UNDAMAGED AND
PROPERLY CONNECTED BEFORE ATTEMPTING EXPOSURES
ENSURE THAT THE FOLLOWING ITEMS ARE COMPLETED PRIOR TO PERFORMING THE
ACCEPTANCE TESTING:
• The generator is interfaced to room equipment noted in the product description.

• The tube auto calibration has been done as per chapter 2 of this manual.
• The receptors have been programmed as per chapter 3C of this manual.
• If the installation has AEC; verify that all receptors have been calibrated as per chapter 3D of this
manual.
• If the installation has ABS; verify that the imaging system has been calibrated as per chapter 3E of
this manual.
• Acceptance testing shall only be started after the installation is complete i.e.; generator in final position
and installed as per chapter 1C.
4.2.0 REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT FOR GENERATOR VERIFICATION.
• KV measuring device such as a dynalyzer (or equivalent). This will be required for verifying kV and mA
calibration during preventative maintenance or if recalibration is necessary, for example after
replacing the generator CPU board or control board 1 in the HF power supply. See note on page 11
regarding use of a Dynalyzer on Indico 100 generators.
• Storage oscilloscope.
• mA/mAs meter.
• Radiation meter 0-1000 mR and 1-15 R/min.
• Lead diaphragm or equivalent to collimate the beam.
• General purpose DVM.
• Strobe or reed tachometer.
• Current probe 0 to 20 amps AC.
• A set of HVL filters.
• Calculator
Page 4-2 Rev. F Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-08
4.3.0 CONSOLE OVERVIEW
Figure 4-1 shows the designations of the membrane switches for the 23 X 56 (cm) console and for the 13
X 42 (cm) console as referenced in the acceptance test procedure.
ACCUM
20
ZERO
19
18
17
14
13
15
16
12
11
10
7
6
5
4
3
IN D IC ATO R
2
A E C F IE LD
A E C “O N ”
SCREEN
S E LE C T
S E LE C T
S E L EC T
SE L E C T
1
FO C U S
TECH
FILM
Figure 4-1: Console switch designations
4.4.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (BASIC FUNCTIONS)
Refer to figure 4-1 for switch designations 1 to 20 in the following steps.
4.4.1 Console Rad Tests
Step Action Result Check

1. Press power ON then power OFF buttons on
console. Unit switches on and off.
2. Press power ON again to switch unit on. Unit switches on.
3. Press each of the receptor buttons 1 to 6 that Verify that the adjacent LED
are active (those that have been enabled lights for each receptor. For
during generator configuration). receptor 6 only the top LED will
light (23 X 56 cm console).
NOTE: THE TECH SELECT BUTTON IN STEPS 4, 5, 6 WILL ONLY BE FUNCTIONAL IF APR MODE
HAS BEEN DISABLED DURING GENERATOR CONFIGURATION (TECH SELECT IS DISABLED IF
APR MODE ENABLED).
4. Select an active radiographic receptor that has A: AEC LED lights.
AEC programmed. B: kV value displayed.
Press TECH SELECT to select AEC C: mA value displayed.
Verify the following displays: D: “AEC”, mAs value or ms value
displayed depending on AEC
backup mode selected.
E: density value displayed.
5. Press TECH SELECT to select mAs A: mAs LED lights.
Verify the following displays: B: kV value displayed.
C: mAs value displayed.
6. Press TECH SELECT to select mA/ms A: mA/ms LED lights.
Verify the following displays: B: kV value displayed.
C: mA value displayed.
D: ms value displayed.
7. Press the kV +/- buttons. kV increases if kV + pressed.
kV decreases if kV - pressed.
8. Ensure that three point operation is selected
(mA/ms). mA increases if mA + pressed.
Press the mA +/- buttons. mA decreases if mA - pressed.
9. Ensure that three point operation is selected
(mA/ms). ms increases if ms + pressed.
Press the ms +/- buttons. ms decreases if ms - pressed.
10. Ensure that AEC is selected. Density increases if density +
Press the DENSITY +/- buttons. pressed.
Density decreases if density -
pressed.
11. Press the FOCUS button. Large and small focal spot LED’s
alternately light as the switch is
toggled.
12. Ensure that AEC is selected. The three film screen LED’s (I, II,
Press the FILM SCREEN button. III) alternately light as the switch
is toggled.
13. Press the PREP button. The adjacent LED lights.
14. Press the X-ray button. The X-ray warning indicator lights
Select 60 kV, 50 mA, 100 ms for this during an X-ray exposure, and an
exposure. audible tone is heard from the
console.
4.4.1 Console Rad Tests (Cont)

14. Ensure that AEC is selected. The three field indicator LED’s
Press the FIELD button (23 X 56 cm console) light to indicate field selection
or press the individual AEC field select buttons [L+C+R], [R], [C], [R+C], [L],
in sequence (31 X 42 cm console). [L+R], [L+C] as the switch is
toggled (23 X 56 cm console).
For the 31 X 42 cm console, the
left, center, right field selection
LED’s should light as each field is
selected.
15. Press power OFF button on console. Unit switches off.
4.4.2 Console Fluoro Tests
This section applies only to R&F units.
BEFORE CONTINUING, ENSURE THAT THE REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL IS CONNECTED (IF
USED WITH THIS INSTALLATION).

1. Press power ON button on console. Unit switches on.
2. Select an active fluoro receptor 1 to 6. A: Fluoro display area of console
lights.
B: Remote fluoro control panel
lights (if used).
3. Press the DOSE button 17. Dose display on LCD display
changes as switch is toggled.
4. Press the MAG button 20 on the console. A: Mag display on console LCD
Press the MAG +/- buttons on the remote and remote fluoro display
fluoro control if used. changes (IF I/I MODES
ENABLED DURING
GENERATOR
CONFIGURATION) as switch
20 is toggled.
B: Mag display on console LCD
and remote fluoro display
increases if MAG + button is
pressed, decreases if MAG -
button on the remote fluoro
control is pressed (IF I/I
MODES ENABLED DURING
GENERATOR
CONFIGURATION.
5. Press the ABS button 19 on the Console to A: The LED adjacent to button
enter ABS mode. 19 lights.
B: The LED adjacent to the ABS
button on the remote fluoro
control if used lights.
6. Press the ABS button on the remote fluoro ABS indicator LED’s adjacent to
control if used, else press ABS button 19 on ABS buttons on console and
the console. remote fluoro control if used are
off.
4.4.2 Console Fluoro Tests (Cont)

7. Press the fluoro kV +/- buttons on the console KV increases if kv + pressed.
and remote fluoro control if used. KV decreases if kv - pressed.
Confirm tracking of kV displays
on console and remote fluoro
control.
8. Press the fluoro mA +/- buttons on the console MA increases if mA + pressed.
and remote fluoro control if used. MA decreases if mA - pressed.
Confirm tracking of mA displays
on console and remote fluoro
control.
9. Press ACCUM button on console. ACC indicator will light/extinguish
on console as the switch is
toggled.
10. Press ACCUM button on remote fluoro control ACC indicator will light/extinguish
if used. on remote fluoro control as the
switch is toggled.
11. Press the pulse fluoro button 18 on the The pulse fluoro indicator will
console (if pulse fluoro option is fitted). light/extinguish as the switch is
toggled.
12. Press power OFF button on console. Unit switches off.
4.4.3 Generator Preliminary Tests
WARNING: USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN MEASURING HIGH VOLTAGES.
NOTE: VERIFY THE POSITION OF EACH OF THE SWITCHES OF SW1 ON THE

GENERATOR CPU BOARD FOR THE GENERATOR UNDER TEST AS PER THE
TABLE BELOW. THESE SWITCHES MUST BE SET CORRECTLY PRIOR TO
CONTINUING. REFER TO THE PRODUCT DESCRIPTION (SECTION 1D) AS
NECESSARY FOR PRODUCT DEFINITION.
For GENERATOR POWER, refer to copy of the product description (PD)

form in Chapter 1D
GENERATOR POWER SW1-3 SW1-2 SW1-1
30 kW (350 Series) ON ON OFF
37.5 kW (Indico 100 only) ON OFF ON
50 kW (650 Series) OFF ON ON
65 kW (850 Series) OFF ON OFF
80 kW (1050 Seies) OFF OFF ON
SW1-4: OFF for two filament boards, ON for one filament board.
SW1-5: OFF for 150 max kV, ON for 125 max kV. Refer to PD near top of page 2.
SW1-6: OFF for dual speed, ON for low speed. Refer to PD near top of page 3.
SW1-7: OFF for 2 tube, ON for 1 tube. Refer to PD near top of page 3.
SW1-8: ON. It is strongly suggested this switch not inadvertently be set to OFF!
Setting to OFF resets to factory defaults (calibration, configuration, etc)
4.4.3 Generator Preliminary Tests (Cont)

1. Ensure unit switched OFF. DS1 on generator interface board
lit.
2. Press power ON button on console. One or more LED’s on
driver/auxiliary board in HF power
supply are lit. This step does not
apply to Indico 100 generators.
3. Switch OFF console.
Switch NORMAL/LOCKOUT switch on
generator interface board to LOCKOUT. Generator will not switch on with
Switch console ON. switch in lockout position.
4. Switch NORMAL/LOCKOUT switch to
NORMAL position.
Switch Console ON. Unit switches on.
5. Verify that each active receptor (those that Receptor 1 Tube # _____
have been enabled during generator Receptor 2 Tube # _____
configuration) displays the desired X-ray tube Receptor 3 Tube # _____
on the LCD display. Receptor 4 Tube # _____
Receptor 5 Tube # _____
Receptor 6 Tube # _____
6. Verify that each active receptor selects the
desired AEC channel. This must be done by
measuring the voltage at specified pins on the
AEC board edge connector.
Logic low (approx. 1 VDC) means CHANNEL
ENABLED, logic high (approx. 11.5 VDC)
means CHANNEL DISABLED.
Refer to figure 4-2 for pin assignments on the Receptor 1 Ch # _______
AEC board: Receptor 2 Ch # _______
CHANNEL 1 = PIN 8 Receptor 3 Ch # _______
7. Switch OFF the console. N/A
Figure 4-2: AEC board pin assignments
THE MILLENIA AND INDICO 100 FAMILY OF GENERATORS IS FITTED WITH A LOW SPEED
STARTER, OR OPTIONAL DUAL SPEED STARTER. USE SECTION 4.4.4 OR 4.4.5 AS APPLICABLE
FOR YOUR GENERATOR.
4.4.4 Low Speed Starter Verification

1. Connect a current probe to the common lead
of tube 1. A 60 Hz waveform dropping to
Switch ON the console. less than half amplitude after
Press and hold the “PREP” button. prep complete.
2. Measure the rotor boost time. Should be approximately 1.5 sec.
3. Use a strobe or reed tachometer and verify
that the tube(s) reach operating speed at end
of boost. Speed ≥ 3300 RPM.
FOLLOW STEPS 4 TO 6 IF TUBE 2 IS USED (LOW SPEED STARTER)
4. Connect a current probe to the common lead A 60 Hz waveform dropping to
of tube 2. less than half amplitude after
5. Measure the rotor boost time. Should be approximately 1.5 sec.
of boost. Speed ≥ 3300 RPM.
7. Switch OFF the console. N/A
4.4.5 Dual Speed Starter Verification
From the product description, be sure the actual tube being used is correctly selected at the dual speed
starter. Review chapter 2, table 2-1 (tube select table).
Tube 1 selection verified _______

Tube 2 selection verified _______
THE GENERATOR MUST BE PROGRAMMED FOR DUAL SPEED STARTER OPERATION IN ORDER
TO BE ABLE TO VERIFY BOTH MODES OF OPERATION IN THIS SECTION.
***** PLEASE OBSERVE A MAXIMUM OF 2 HIGH SPEED BOOSTS PER MINUTE *****

of tube 1.
Switch ON the console. A 60 Hz waveform dropping to
Select 70 kVp, minimum mA, 50 mSec. less than half amplitude after
2. Measure the rotor boost time. Should agree with value in
chapter 2, table 2-1.
3. Select 100 kVp, maximum mA, 50 ms, small A 180 Hz waveform dropping to
focus. less than half amplitude after
4.4.5 Dual Speed Starter Verification (Cont)

4. Measure the rotor boost time. Should agree with value in table
2-1.
of boost. Use the techniques in steps 1 and 3
to select low and high speed modes Low Speed ≥ 3300 RPM.
respectively. High Speed ≥ 9500 RPM.
6. After a high speed prep, verify that the Will hear the X-ray tube slow
dynamic brake is applied. down to 60 Hz.
FOLLOW STEPS 7 TO 12 IF TUBE 2 IS USED (DUAL SPEED STARTER)
of tube 2. A 60 Hz waveform dropping to
Select 70 kVp, minimum mA, 50 mSec. less than half amplitude after
2-1.
9. Select 100 kVp, maximum mA , 50 ms, small A 180 Hz waveform dropping to
focus. less than half amplitude after
2-1.
of boost. Use the techniques in steps 7 and 9
to select low and high speed modes Low Speed ≥ 3300 RPM.
respectively. High Speed ≥ 9500 RPM.
12. After a high speed prep, verify that the Will hear the X-ray tube slow
dynamic brake is applied. down to 60 Hz.
13. Switch OFF the console N/A
4.5.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (KVP, TIME, MA AND MAS)
4.5.1 Generator Rad Tests
Measurement of kVp, mA, and time may be done via test points at the generator CPU board as per figure
4-3. These are direct feedback voltages and are scaled to represent the actual kVp and X-ray tube current
AS LONG AS THE GENERATOR IS CALIBRATED.
REFER TO NOTES ON PAGE 11.
NOTE: TEST EQUIPMENT TOLERANCES MUST BE ALLOWED FOR IN THE MEASUREMENTS IN

THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS. LIMITS STATED ARE THE MAXIMUM ALLOWED LIMITS,
INCLUDING EQUIPMENT TOLERANCES AND MEASUREMENT ERROR.
4.5.1 Generator Rad Tests (Cont)
G EN ER ATO R C PU B O AR D
TP8
TP6
T P 10
TP7
T P 12
TP9
T P 14
T P 11
T P 15
T P 13
T P 24
T P 25
T P 22
T P 23
T P 16
T P 17
T P 18
T P 19
T P 20
T P 21
F ILE : M L _C P U 1 .C D R
KVP - + TP8 1 V O LT = 20 K V
TP6
RAD mA - + TP 10 1 V O LT = 1 0 0 m A
TP7
AEC RAMP - + TP 12
TP9
FLUO RO mA T P 11 -+ TP 14 1 V O LT = 2 .5 m A
TP 13 + - TP 15
ABS
T H E S C A LIN G FA C TO R S L IS T ED A B O V E A R E N O M IN A L VA LU E S .
N O TE : TH IS D IA G R A M IS TY P IC A L, AC TU A L G E N ER ATO R C P U
B O A R D S M AY D IF F E R IN D E TA IL
Figure 4-3: Test point locations
CAUTION: THE FOLLOWING TESTS REQUIRE THE PRODUCTION OF X-RADIATION. USE APPROPRIATE
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT PERSONNEL.
NOTE: IF USING TEST POINTS TP6 & 8, TP7 & 10, TP11 & 14 IN FIGURE 4-3 FOR
ACCEPTANCE TESTING, THE SCALING FACTORS SHOWN MUST BE
VERIFIED USING AN APPROPRIATE CALIBRATED REFERENCE STANDARD.
THE ACTUAL MEASURED SCALING VALUES SHOULD THEN BE USED IN
THIS PROCEDURE.
NOTE: A DYNALYZER IS NOT RECOMMENDED FOR MA MEASUREMENTS WITH 100 KHZ INDICO 100
GENERATORS. BANDWIDTH LIMITATIONS OF THE DYNALYZER WILL RESULT IN
INACCURATE MA MEASUREMENTS AT MA VALUES LESS THAN APPROXIMATELY 100 MA.
MA MEASUREMENTS SHOULD BE MADE WITH AN MA/MAS METER CONNECTED TO THE MA
TEST JACKS ON THE HT TANK. EXPOSURE TIMES MUST BE GREATER THAN 100 MS TO
ENSURE ACCURATE MEASUREMENTS.
Refer to figure 4-3 for test point locations referenced in the following section(s).

1. SEE NOTE ABOVE RE USE OF TEST N/A
POINTS FOR VERIFYING CALIBRATION
Connect ‘scope probe channel 1 input to TP6

and TP8 (kVp)
and TP10 (Rad mA).
Adjust ‘scope gains as required. Use the KV
signal to trigger the ‘scope.
2. Switch ON the generator and after initialization N/A
select the following radiographic technique:
kVp = 100, mA = 100, Time = 50 ms
Select an off-table receptor.
3. Make an exposure and measure the kVp at kVp = 100 KV ± 3%.
TP6 and TP8 and the Rad mA at TP7 and mA = 100 mA ± 4% (Millenia).
TP10. Using scaling factors in figure 4-3, verify mA = 100 mA ± 5% (Indico 100).
the following results: Time = 50 ms ± 2 ms.
4. Repeat step 3 but set the values to kVp = 65 KV ± 3%.
kVp = 65, mA = 200. mA = 200 mA ± 4% (Millenia).
mA = 200 mA ± 5% (Indico 100).
Time = 50 ms ± 2 ms.

5. Repeat step 3 but set the values to kVp = 125 KV ± 3%.
kVp = 125, mA = 200. mA = 200 mA ± 4% (Millenia).
mA = 200 mA ± 4% (Indico 100).
Time = 50 ms ± 2 ms.
6. Select 75 kVp, 200 mA.
Select the exposure times shown below (3
point operation).
(Measure time and mA on the ‘scope and

check that their product is as per the RESULT
column).
Measure time at 75% of the peak kVp

waveform.
A: 10 ms (2 mAs) A: 2 mAs ± 5%.

B: 20 ms (4 mAs) B: 4 mAs ± 5%.
C: 63 ms (12 mAs) C: 12 mAs ± 5%.
D: 100 ms (20 mAs) D: 20 mAs ± 5%.
7. Select 75 kVp. NOTE: The time associated with
Select the mAs shown below (2 point each mAs setting will vary
operation). depending on generator
configuration.
Measure time at 75% of the peak kVp Use the time displayed in the
waveform. LCD window as the reference
for the measurements below.
A: 2 mAs (time per LCD display) time per LCD disp ± (2% + 1ms).
B: 8 mAs (time per LCD display) time per LCD disp ± (2% + 1ms).
C: 25 mAs (time per LCD display) time per LCD disp ± (2% + 1ms).
D: 63 mAs (time per LCD display) time per LCD disp ± (2% + 1ms).
8. Select 200 mA, 50 ms (3 point operation).
Select the kVp values shown below.

The measurements may be done non-
invasively or from TP6 and TP8 using the
‘scope.
A: 50 kVp A: 50 kVp ± (3% + 1 kVp).

B: 60 kVp B: 60 kVp ± (3% + 1 kVp).
C: 80 kVp C: 80 kVp ± (3% + 1 kVp).
D: 100 kVp D: 100 kVp ± (3% + 1 kVp).
E: 125 kVp E: 125 kVp ± (3% + 1 kVp).

9. Select 75 kVp, 50 ms (3 point operation).
Select the mA values shown below.
Measure mA at 75% of the peak kVp

waveform.
A: 50 mA A: 50 mA ± (5% + 1 mA).
B: 100 mA B: 100 mA ± (5% + 1 mA).
C: 200 mA C: 200 mA ± (5% + 1 mA).
D: 400 mA D: 400 mA ± (5% + 1 mA).
E: 800 mA E: 800 mA ± (5% + 1 mA).
Note: The higher mA values will not be

available on all generator models and/or
programmed tube types.
4.5.2 Generator Fluoro Tests
This section applies only to R&F units.

1. Place the generator into the fluoro mode of N/A
operation.
and TP8 (kVp).
and TP14 (fluoro mA).
Use the kV signal to trigger the ‘scope.
2. Place imaging system into non-ABS mode or N/A
cover I.I. input with lead.
3. Set 3 mA fluoro.
Select the kV values shown below using the
remote fluoro control if fitted, or the fluoro
section of the console.
A: 50 KV A: 50 kVp ± (10% + 1 kVp).

B: 65 KV B: 65 kVp ± (5% + 1 kVp).
C: 80 KV C: 80 kVp ± (5% + 1 kVp).
D: 100 KV D: 100 kVp ± (5% + 1 kVp).
E: 110 KV E: 110 kVp ± (5% + 1 kVp).
Measure the kVp at TP6 and TP8. Using

scaling factors in figure 4-3 verify kV values
per the RESULTS column:
4.5.2 Generator Fluoro Tests (Cont)

4. Select 70 kVp fluoro.
Select the fluoro mA values shown below:
A: 1.0 mA A: 1.0 mA ± 20%.

B: 2.0 mA B: 2.0 mA ± 20%.
C: 4.0 mA C: 4.0 mA ± 15%.
D: 6.0 mA D: 6.0 mA ± 15%.
Measure the fluoro mA at TP11 and TP14.

Using scaling factors in figure 4-3 verify mA
values per the RESULTS column:
5. Press the PPS + and - buttons (if pulse fluoro Verify that the pulsed fluoro rate
option is fitted). increase and decreases.
6. Run a sufficiently long fluoro exposure to
accumulate some time on the console fluoro
display, and on the remote fluoro control if
used Verify that the accumulated time
Press the ZERO button on the console and on is reset to ZERO after pressing
the remote fluoro control if applicable. each of the ZERO buttons.
4.6.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (OPTIONAL INTERFACES)
Refer to separate supplements in this manual for further information IF APPLICABLE.
4.7.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (AEC)
This section applies only to generators with AEC.
• Review Section 3D: AEC Calibration

• Recheck the mAs, Dose, and O.D. as recorded during initial installation. Follow the appropriate steps
in section 3D to verify the AEC calibration.
4.8.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (ABS)
This section applies only to non-digital R&F generators with ABS.
• Review section 3E: ABS calibration.

• Recheck the dose limits and input dose as described in the procedure.
4.9.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (HVL, LINEARITY AND REPRODUCIBILITY)
The procedure for performing reproducibility, linearity and HVL testing is contained in a separate
document, part number 740917 which immediately follows this page.
CPI Canada Inc Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing
SUPPLEMENT
REPRODUCIBILTY, LINEARITY,
& HVL TESTING
CONTENTS:
1.0 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................................................2

2.0 EQUIPMENT SETUP............................................................................................................................................3
3.0 REPRODUCIBILITY .............................................................................................................................................3
4.0 LINEARITY............................................................................................................................................................7
5.0 H.V.L. EVALUATION ............................................................................................................................................9
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement 740917-00 Rev. A Page 1

Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing CPI Canada Inc
1.0 INTRODUCTION
This supplement describes reproducibility, linearity, and half - value layer (HVL) tests which may be used
to verify performance of medical X-ray generators.
NOTE: THIS SUPPLEMENT DETAILS TYPICAL REPRODUCIBILITY, LINEARITY, AND HVL

TESTS. LOCAL REGULATIONS SHOULD ALWAYS BE CONSULTED PRIOR TO
PERFORMING THESE TESTS, AS DETAILS MAY VARY IN SOME JURISDICTIONS,
OR ADDITIONAL TESTS MAY NEED TO BE PERFORMED.
WARNING: SOME EXPOSURES IN THIS SECTION MUST BE TAKEN AT THE MAXIMUM

GENERATOR KVP. THE X-RAY TUBE MUST BE KNOWN TO BE CAPABLE OF
OPERATION AT THAT KVP VALUE, AND THE TUBE SHOULD FIRST BE SEASONED
TO ENSURE THAT OPERATION AT HIGH KVP VALUES WILL NOT BE
PROBLEMATIC.
Page 2 Rev. A X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement 740917-00

2.0 EQUIPMENT SETUP
1. Place the radiation probe above the table approximately 25 cm (10”). Select an SID of
approximately 100 cm (40”).
2. Place a lead diaphragm over the detector and adjust its height so that the X-ray beam covers the
detector but does not over radiate the sides of the ‘R’ probe. Refer to figure 1.
Figure 1: mR measurement setup
3.0 REPRODUCIBILITY
Calculate reproducibility as follows:
1. Using kV and mA/ms or mAs values per tables 1 to 4, make a series of 5 exposures.
2. Record each of the measured mR values in the appropriate table. Refer to step 3 before
beginning step 2.
3. Record the preselected mAs for each series of exposures in the header of each table. For 3 point
generators, this is the calculated mAs value where mAs = mA X time in seconds (example for 160
mA and 125 ms, mAs = 160 X 0.125 = 20 mAs).

3.0 REPRODUCIBILITY (Cont)
4. Calculate and record the average dose mR.
5. Calculate the difference mR - mR for each exposure.
6. Square each difference from the previous step.
7. Calculate the sum of the differences squared.
8. Calculate the standard deviation (S) by using the formula.
9. Calculate reproducibility by dividing S by mR.
10. Table 5 shows example reproducibility calculations.
11. If linearity is to be measured, it is suggested that dose measurements be taken at this time for
entry into tables 6 and 7. Refer to 4.0 LINEARITY for details.
IN TABLES 1 TO 4, 3 POINT MEANS THAT FOR GENERATORS WHERE KV, MA, AND TIME
SELECTION IS AVAILABLE, THE KV, MA AND MS VALUES SHOWN SHOULD BE USED. FOR
GENERATORS WHERE 2 POINT OPERATION ONLY IS AVAILABLE, THE KV AND MAS VALUES
SHOWN SHOULD BE USED.
3 point = Minimum kV, maximum mA, 100 ms.

2 point = Minimum kV, maximum mAs. mAs = __________
2
EXP No. DOSE (mR) DIFFERENCE DIFFERENCE
1
2
3
4
5
Calculate each of the differences Square each difference. Then
2
mR = ie: DIFF1 = mR1 - mR. calculate the sum of the difference .
2
________ Repeat for each remaining mR Sum of difference = _________
value.
Calculate standard deviation (S) using formula at beginning of this section: S = __________
Calculate reproducibility = S = _________ (not to exceed 0.045)

mR
Table 1: Reproducibility

3 point = Maximum kV, minimum mA, 100 ms.

2 point = Maximum kV, minimum mAs. mAs = __________
2
1
2
3
4
5
2
2
value.

mR
3 point = 50% of maximum kV, 250 ms, mA to give 100 - 500 µR (1 - 5 µGy) dose.
2 point = 50% of maximum kV, mAs to give 100 - 500 µR (1 - 5 µGy) dose. mAs = __________
2
1
2
3
4
5
2
2
value.

mR

3 point = 80% of maximum kV, 250 ms, mA to give 100 - 500 µR (1 - 5 µGy) dose.
2 point = 80% of maximum kV, mAs to give 100 - 500 µR (1 - 5 µGy) dose. MAS = __________
2
1
2
3
4
5
2
2
value.

mR
EXAMPLE mAs = _20_

2
1 249.0 4.4 19.36
2 245.0 0.4 0.16
3 244.0 0.6 0.36
4 242.0 2.6 6.76
5 243.0 1.6 2.56
2
2
_244.6_ Repeat for each remaining mR Sum of difference = _29.2_
value.
Calculate standard deviation (s) using formula at beginning of this section: S = _2.70_
Calculate reproducibility = S = _0.011_ (not to exceed 0.045)

mR

4.0 LINEARITY
1. Record two additional series of dose measurements for entry into tables 6 and 7:
• For table 6, use settings per table 3 EXCEPT use an mA (or mAs) value adjacent to the mA
(or mAs) setting used in table 3.
• For table 7, use settings per table 4 EXCEPT use an mA (or mAs) value adjacent to the mA
(or mAs) setting used in table 4.
• Record the mAs in the header of tables 6 and 7 as per 3.0 step 3.
1. Calculate and record the average dose mR for table 6 and 7.
2. Record the preselected mAs and the average dose values taken from tables 3 and 4, and from
tables 6 and 7, at the top of the next page.
3. Using the appropriate mAs and mR values, calculate X3, X4, X6, and X7 in tables 8 and 9.
4. Calculate the coefficient of linearity, L, as per tables 8 and 9.
mAs = __________
EXP No. DOSE (mR)
1
2
3
4
5
mR = ________
Table 6: Linearity
mAs = __________
EXP No. DOSE (mR)
1
2
3
4
5
mR = ________
Table 7: Linearity

4.0 LINEARITY (Cont)
Record the mAs and mR values taken from tables 3, 4, 6, and 7 below.
Table 3 mAs3 = _____ mR3 = _____
Table 4 mAs4 = _____ mR4 = _____
Table 6 mAs6 = _____ mR6 = _____
Table 7 mAs7 = _____ mR7 = _____
mR3
X3 = = ________
mAs3
mR6
X6 = = ________
mAs6
X3 - X6
L = = ________ (not to exceed 0.095)
X3 + X6
In the numerator of the above equation, use the absolute value of X3 - X6
(disregard the minus sign).
Table 8: Linearity
mR4
X4 = = ________
mAs4
mR7
X7 = = ________
mAs7
X4 - X7
L = = ________ (not to exceed 0.095)
X4 + X7
In the numerator of the above equation, use the absolute value of X4 - X7
(disregard the minus sign).
Table 9: Linearity

5.0 H.V.L. EVALUATION
1. Be sure the X-ray source assembly (X-ray tube and beam limiting device) is fully assembled and
functional.
2. Use the test setup as per figure 1.
3. Set the generator as follows: 3 point generators, 80 kV, 200 mA, 50 ms, large focus. For 2 point
generators use 80 kV, 200 mA if this can be set, and 10 mAs.
4. Take a series of three exposures and record the mR values in table 10. Calculate and record the
average of the three exposures.
5. Place 2 mm of Al on top of the lead diaphragm (total of 2 mm added), repeat the exposure and
record the mR value in table 10.
6. Place an additional 1 mm of Al on top of the lead diaphragm (total of 3 mm added), repeat the
exposure; and record the mR value in table 10.
7. Place an additional 3 mm of Al on top of the lead diaphragm (total of 6 mm added), repeat the
exposure; and record the mR value in table 10.
8. The relative transmission for the average of the three mR values where no Al was added is
assigned a value of 1.00. Using that base, assign relative transmission values to the remaining
mR values. For example, if the average mR value was 247 and has a relative transmission factor
of 1.00, then 162 mR will have a relative transmission of 162 / 247 = 0.66.
9. Plot the relative transmission values in figure 1. This should produce a straight line on the graph
since the X-axis is logarithmic.
10. Interpolate to determine the HVL. The Al thickness at a relative transmission of 0.5 will be the
required HVL value.
11. Repeat steps 4 to 10: 3 point generators, 100 kV, 200 mA, 50 ms, large focus. For 2 point
generators use 100 kV, 200 mA if this can be set, and 10 mAs. Use table 11 to record the values
and figure 2 to plot the results
12. Table 12 and figure 3 show example HVL determination.

5.0 H.V.L. EVALUATION (Cont)
ADDED ALUMINUM FILTER DOSE (mR) RELATIVE TRANSMISSION

0
0
0
0 (Average of three readings) 1.00
2
1
3
Table 10: HVL dose values 80 kVp
Figure 1: HVL plot 80 kVp
For 80 kVp, the HVL must be ≥ 2.3 mm Al.


0
0
0
0 (Average of three readings) 1.00
2
1
3
Table 11: HVL dose values 100 kVp
Figure 2: HVL plot 100 kVp
For 100 kVp, the HVL must be ≥ 2.7 mm Al.


0 249
0 244
0 247
0 (Average of above three readings) 247 1.00
2 162 .66
1 131 .53
3 70 .28
Table 12: HVL dose values (example)
Figure 3: HVL plot (example)
By interpolating the thickness of Al at a relative transmission value of 0.5, it can be seen that the HVL is
approximately 3.3.

CPI Canada Inc Troubleshooting 5
CHAPTER 5
TROUBLESHOOTING
CONTENTS:
SECTION TITLE
5.1.0 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2.0 STATUS AND ERROR CODES ............................................................................................................................ 5-2
5.2.1 Operator Messages ............................................................................................................................................ 5-2
5.2.2 Limit Messages................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.3 Error Messages .................................................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.1.0 INTRODUCTION
The Millenia and Indico 100 console will display status messages on the LCD display during normal and
abnormal operation of the generator. This chapter contains tables of those messages and suggests actions to
be taken by service personnel to correct any malfunctions that may occur.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-09 Rev. B Page 5-1
5 Troubleshooting CPI Canada Inc
5.2.0 STATUS AND ERROR CODES
5.2.1 Operator Messages
These messages indicate the status of the generator. No action is required.
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
INITIALIZATION Displayed during power up sequence.
SPINNING ROTOR Displayed when prep state is active.
X-RAY READY Displayed when generator is ready to expose
X-RAY ON Displayed during both a rad and fluoro exposure.
5.2.2 Limit Messages
These messages indicate that an exposure has been requested that exceeds one or more limits.
MESSAGE PROBLEM ACTION

TUBE KV LIMIT Requested kV not allowed as tube kV limit None.
has been reached.
GEN KV LIMIT Requested kV not allowed as generator kV None.
limit has been reached.
TUBE MA LIMIT Requested mA not allowed as tube mA limit None.
has been reached.
GEN MA LIMIT Requested mA not allowed as generator mA None.
TUBE KW LIMIT Requested parameter not allowed as tube None.
kW limit has been reached.
GEN KW LIMIT Requested parameter not allowed as None.
generator kW limit has been reached.
TUBE MAS LIMIT Requested mAs not allowed as tube mAs None.
GEN MAS LIMIT Requested mAs not allowed as generator None.
mAs limit has been reached.
GEN MS LIMIT Requested ms not allowed as generator ms None.
CAL LIMIT Requested parameter not calibrated. Recalibrate X-ray tube
or select a calibrated
parameter.
AEC DENSITY LIM Requested density not programmed. Select another density
or program requested
density step.
ANODE HEAT WARN Anode has exceeded programmed warning Wait for anode to cool.
level.
FL TIMER WARN Fluoro interval timer ≥ 5.0 mins. Reset fluoro timer.
INVALID PARAM Generator detected invalid parameter within Select valid parameter.
received message, message ignored.
HOUSE HEAT WARN X-ray tube housing heat has exceeded Wait for housing to
housing warning limit. cool.
Page 5-2 Rev. B Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-09
5.2.2 Limit Messages (Cont)
GEN DUTY WARNING The generator has exceeded its duty cycle Re-evaluate technique
warning limit. factors. Allow
generator to cool if
possible. If exposures
are continued, serious
generator damage
may result due to
overheating.
5.2.3 Error Messages
These messages indicate that an error has occurred. The errors are logged in the error log, previous errors
should be reviewed by service personnel before taking further action.
ERROR CODE MESSAGE PROBLEM ACTION

E001 GEN EPROM ERR Generator CPU EPROM has Call product support
been corrupted. for new generator
CPU EPROM.
E003 GEN NVRAM ERR Generator CPU NVRAM Re-initialize
data has been corrupted. generator CPU
NVRAM using
generator factory
defaults.
E004 GEN RTC ERROR Generator CPU real time Reset time and date.
clock is not functioning.
E005 PS CONTACT ERR Main contactor in HF power Call product support.
supply did not energize.
E006 ROTOR FAULT 1. Rotor starter may have Power unit off and
detected a current fault in retry rotor start.
the stator.
2. Power supply was not

ready to start rotor.
E007 FILAMENT FAULT Power supply has detected 1. Check for open
filament current <2 amps. filament in X-ray
tube.
2. Check for poor

connections in the
cathode cable.
3. Check fuses on
filament board(s).
5.2.3 Error Messages (Cont)

E008 KV/MA FAULT Power supply has detected 1. If arcing of the X-
a fault in the kV or mA ray tube is
output during an exposure suspected, check
and immediately terminated condition of tube.
the exposure. This may be The X-ray tube
caused by arcing in the X- may be damaged
ray tube, arcing of the HV or simply require
cables, or HT tank. “seasoning”.
Refer to chapter 6
for tube
seasoning
procedure.
2. If failure of HT
tank is suspected,
contact product
support.
E009 PS NOT READY Power supply is not ready to Retry exposure.
make an exposure.
E011 HIGH MA FAULT Generator CPU detected Recalibrate X-ray
mA greater than allowed tube.
tolerance.
E012 LOW MA FAULT Generator CPU detected Recalibrate X-ray
mA less than allowed tube.
tolerance.
E013 MANUAL TERMIN Operator released exposure 1. Re-take exposure
switch during exposure. if necessary.
2. Check for faulty

switch contacts or
wiring.
E014 AEC BUT ERROR AEC exposure exceeded 1. Check exposure
allowed back up time. technique
settings.
2. Check that correct

AEC chamber is
energized.
E015 AEC BU MAS ERR AEC exposure exceeded 1. Check exposure
allowed back up mAs. technique
settings.
2. Check that correct

AEC chamber is
energized.

E016 TOMO BUT ERROR Tomo exposure exceeded 1. Check exposure
back up time. technique
settings.
2. Increase tomo
back up time if
necessary.
E017 NOT CALIBRATED Selected mA not calibrated Recalibrate X-ray
for selected kV. tube.
E018 PREP TIMEOUT Generator has been in prep Reduce length of
state too long. time in prep state.
E019 ANODE HEAT LIMIT Selected parameters will Reduce parameters
cause X-ray tube to exceed or wait for tube to
its programmed anode heat cool.
limit.
E020 THERMAL INT #1 X-ray tube # 1 too hot and Wait for X-ray tube #
its thermal switch has 1 to cool.
opened.
E021 THERMAL INT #2 X-ray tube # 2 too hot and Wait for X-ray tube #
its thermal switch has 2 to cool.
opened.
E022 DOOR INTERLOCK Door is open. Close door.
E023 COLLIMATOR ERR Collimator is not ready. Check collimator.
E024 CASSETTE ERROR Cassette is not ready. Check cassette.
E025 II SAFETY INT II safety is not ready. Check II safety.
E026 SPARE INT Spare input is not ready. Check spare input.
E028 PREP SW CLOSED Prep input active during Check prep switch
power on initialization and input for short
phase. circuit.
E029 X-RAY SW CLOSED X-ray input active during Check X-ray switch
phase. circuit.
E030 FLUORO SW CLOSED Fluoro input active during Check fluoro switch
phase. circuit.
E031 REMOTE COMM ERR Communication error 1. Check remote
detected with remote fluoro fluoro control cable
control unit. for damage and
proper connection.
2. Turn power off

and then on to
Reset Generator.

E032 CONSOLE COMM ERR Generator has detected 1. Check console
error in communication to cable for damage
console. and proper
connection.
2. Turn power off and

then on to reset
generator.
E033 GEN BATTERY LOW Generator detects lithium Replace lithium
battery voltage is low. battery.
E034 +12VDC ERROR +12VDC rail is out of Check +12VDC rail.
tolerance.
E035 -12VDC ERROR -12VDC rail is out of Check -12VDC rail.
tolerance.
E036 +15VDC ERROR +15VDC rail is out of Check +15VDC rail.
tolerance.
E037 -15VDC ERROR -15VDC rail is out of Check -15VDC rail.
tolerance.
E038 CAL DATA ERROR Generator detects corrupt Re-calibrate X-ray
calibration data. tube(s).
E039 AEC DATA ERROR Generator detects corrupt Reprogram AEC data
AEC data. or set factory
defaults.
E040 FLUORO DATA ERROR Generator detects corrupt Reprogram fluoro
Fluoro data. data or set factory
defaults.
E041 REC DATA ERROR Generator detects corrupt Reprogram receptor
receptor data. data or set factory
defaults.
E042 TUBE DATA ERR Generator detects corrupt Reprogram tube data
tube data. or set factory
defaults.
E043 KV ERROR KV detected in non x-ray Switch OFF
state. generator. Prevent
further use of
generator. Call
product support.
E044 COMM ERROR Received communication Reset error.
message not valid and
ignored.
E045 NOT SUPPORTED Received message valid, Reset error.
but not supported by this
system.
E046 MODE INHIBITED Received message valid, Reset error.
but not allowed during
present state.
E047 FL TIMER LIMIT Fluoro Timer has exceeded Reset Fluoro timer.
time limit.

E048 FOCUS MISMATCH Focus selected does not Check power supply
match current focus enabled interface cables
by power supply. between power
supply and generator
CPU board.
E049 NOT ENABLED Requested function not Reprogram to enable
programmed to be enabled. function.
E050 GEN DATA ERROR Generator detects corrupt Reprogram generator
generator limit data. limit data or set
factory defaults.
E051 AEC DEVICE ERR Generator has detected no 1. Check that X-ray
feedback signal from AEC tube is pointing at
device. correct AEC
device.
2. Check AEC cable

for damage and
proper
connection.
E052 HIGH SF CURRENT Generator detects small Check small focus
focus filament current filament board.
greater than limits in standby
mode.
E053 HIGH LF CURRENT Generator detects large Check large focus
focus filament current filament board.
greater than limits in standby
mode.
E054 AEC OUT OF RANGE AEC reference has reached Re-adjust AEC
a maximum or minimum calibration including
limit. density to operate
within AEC range (O
to 1OVDC).
E055 NO FIELDS ACTIVE AEC enabled but no fields Select AEC field(s).
are selected.
E056 NO TUBE SELECTED All Receptors have no X-ray Program receptor(s)
tube programmed. with tube number.
E057 AEC STOP ERROR AEC stop signal (P.T. stop 1. Check that P.T.
signal) is active low ramp does not
indicating exposure is exceed P.T.
finished during prep state. reference during
prep state.
2. Check AEC device

for proper
operation.

E058 CONSOLE BUT ERR Console has detected Call product support.
exposure exceeded backup
time and terminated
exposure.
E059 HOUSE HEAT LIMIT X-ray tube housing has Wait for tube to cool.
exceeded limit.
E060 EXP KV HIGH KV exceeds high KV 1. Check the output
tolerance level. of the kV
reference DAC on
the generator
CPU board.
2. Measure the
output of the
generator with a
dynalyzer or a
non-invasive kVp
meter.
E061 EXP KV LOW KV exceeds low KV 1. Check the output
tolerance level. of the kV
reference DAC on
the generator
CPU board.
2. Measure the
output of the
generator with a
dynalyzer or a
non-invasive kVp
meter.
E062 EXP_ SW ERROR The EXP_SW signal on the Call product support.
generator Interface and
generator CPU board is
enabled when it should be
disabled.
E063 FACTORY DEFAULTS SW1 switch 8 on the Set SW1 switch 8 to
generator CPU board is set its non default
to default the generator CPU position. The
NVRAM with factory generator will not exit
defaults. the initialization
phase until this
switch is set.
E070 SOFTWARE KEY ERR Defective or missing GAL Call product support
U29 on generator CPU for new GAL U29.
board 734573.
E100 CAL_MAX MA ERR Maximum mA has been Repeat auto
exceed during auto calibration and/or
calibration. decrease standby
current.

E101 CAL_DATA LIMIT Auto calibration has 1. Check to see if
exceeded data table length the filament
due to an excessive number standby current is
of exposures. too low.
2. Retry auto
calibration.
E102 CAL_MAX FIL ERR Maximum filament current 1. Check to see if
for the selected focus has the maximum
been exceeded. filament current
limit can be
increased.
2. Retry auto
calibration.
E103 CAL_MAN TERM Operator released exposure Retry auto
button during auto Calibration.
calibration.
E104 CAL_NO MA No mA feedback detected Check power supply
during auto calibration. Interface cables
between HF power
supply and generator
CPU board.
E105 CAL_MIN MA ERR Minimum generator mA was Reduce filament
exceeded at start of standby current on
calibration. This is usually primary and/or
caused by too high a secondary filament.
filament standby current on
the primary and or
secondary filament. (Primary
is the current filament being
calibrated, secondary is the
other filament and applies
only to generators with two
independent filament
supplies).
CPI Canada Inc Regular Maintenance 6
CHAPTER 6
REGULAR MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS:
Section Title
6.1.0 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2.0 X-RAY GENERATOR UPDATE/SERVICE RECORD ........................................................................................... 6-2
6.3.0 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ................................................................................................................................ 6-2
6.4.0 OIL FILL/LEVEL CHECK (HT TANK) .................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.4.1 Millenia Oil Fill/Level Check................................................................................................................................ 6-4
6.4.2 Indico 100 Oil Fill/Level Check ........................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.5.0 CLEANING............................................................................................................................................................. 6-6
6.6.0 EPROM REPLACEMENT ...................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.6.1 Console EPROM ................................................................................................................................................ 6-6
6.6.2 Power EPROM ................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.6.3 Dual Speed Starter EPROM (If fitted)................................................................................................................. 6-7
6.6.4 Resetting Factory Defaults ................................................................................................................................. 6-7
6.7.0 BATTERY REPLACEMENT................................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.8.0 TUBE CONDITIONING / SEASONING ................................................................................................................. 6-9
6.8.1 Tube Conditioning (Overview) ............................................................................................................................ 6-9
6.8.2 Tube Conditioning (Procedure) .......................................................................................................................... 6-9
6.9.0 END OF PRODUCT LIFE .................................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This chapter of the manual provides a recommended schedule for periodic maintenance of the Millenia and
Indico 100 family of generators.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-10 Rev. D Page 6-1
6 Regular Maintenance CPI Canada Inc
6.2.0 X-RAY GENERATOR UPDATE/SERVICE RECORD
The X-ray generator update/service record is stored in the upper cabinet of the generator (Millenia) or on the
back of the panel which accesses the control boards in the lower cabinet (Indico 100). The installation date and
location should be recorded on this form at the time of the original site installation.
Service and repairs must be recorded in the update/service record. The record should be as thorough
as possible, detailing the scope and type of work that was performed (all service and a record of all
replacement parts that were installed). Additionally, the person performing the work should date and sign the
record.
This information will be invaluable in the future for traceability and to ensure continued compatibility of
the generator.
6.3.0 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
WARNING: MAINTENANCE IS TO BE PERFORMED ONLY BY COMPETENT, TRAINED PERSONNEL WHO

ARE FAMILIAR WITH THE POTENTIAL HAZARDS ASSOCIATED WITH THIS EQUIPMENT.
NOTE: MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE FREQUENCY MAY BE DETERMINED BY CERTAIN REGULATORY

REQUIREMENTS OF THE COUNTRY OR STATE IN WHICH THE INSTALLATION IS LOCATED.
ALWAYS CHECK THE LOCAL CODES AND REGULATIONS WHEN DETERMINING A
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE.
WARNING: ALWAYS SWITCH OFF MAINS POWER TO THE GENERATOR AND WAIT A
MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE BEFORE
BEGINNING ANY PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE, INCLUDING CLEANING.
WARNING: OBSERVE ESD PRECAUTIONS. KEEP ALL STATIC - SENSITIVE COMPONENTS

AND CIRCUIT BOARDS IN THEIR STATIC - SHIELDING PACKAGING UNTIL
READY TO INSTALL. ENSURE THAT YOU ARE GROUNDED AT ALL TIMES
WHEN HANDLING STATIC - SENSITIVE COMPONENTS AND CIRCUIT BOARDS.
Page 6-2 Rev. D Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-10
6.3.0 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (Cont)
Maintenance Description of Preventative Maintenance

Frequency
Every 6 Months AND 1. Clean and re-grease all HV connections using vapour proof
whenever a related compound.
certifiable X-ray
component is replaced: 2. Clean the control console, remote fluoro control (if used) and main
cabinet as needed. REFER TO 6.5.0 CLEANING BEFORE
PROCEEDING
3. Perform the X-ray tube auto calibration routine, refer to chapter 2.
4. Verify the calibration of the generator, refer to chapter 4 of this

manual.
5. Test the X-ray tube thermal switch circuits in the generator.

Disconnect the tube thermal switch(s) and verify the correct error
message, and that X-ray exposures are inhibited.
6. For fan cooled Indico 100 generators in particular, remove

accumulated dust from the cooling vents. Vacuuming is
recommended.
7. Perform any additional tests required by laws governing this

installation.
Every 12 months: 1. Examine the following for any visible damage and replace any
damaged components:
• The exterior of the control console and remote fluoro control if
used, including the membrane switch assembly.
• The cable between the control console and the generator main
cabinet and between the remote fluoro control (if used) and
generator main cabinet.
• The handswitch and fluoro footswitch (if used) and the cables
connecting these to the console.
2. Open the generator cabinet and examine the unit for any visible
damage: missing or loose ground connections, oil leaks, damaged
cables etc.
3. Ensure that there are no obstructions blocking any of the ventilation

holes or louvers on the generator cabinet.
Every 5 years: Replace the lithium battery on the CPU board in the control console
and on the generator CPU board in the main cabinet. Refer to the
spares list in chapter 8 for the required part number. Refer to
subsection 6.7.0 for battery replacement procedure.
6.4.0 OIL FILL/LEVEL CHECK (HT TANK)
The insulating oil level in the HT transformer does NOT require periodic checking under normal conditions.
However, if there is evidence of possible oil loss, the procedure for checking the correct oil level follows. Refer
to 6.4.1 for Millenia generators, and to 6.4.2 for Indico 100 generators.
6.4.1 Millenia Oil Fill/Level Check
1. Using a suitable wrench, remove the oil fill cap on top of the HT transformer.
2. Measure the oil level from the TOP surface of the oil fill flange using a clean ruler. The oil level should
be in the range of 7/8” (22 mm) to 1 3/8” (35 mm) from the top of the flange. Add oil if the oil level is
low, that is greater than 1 3/8” (35 mm) from the top.
3. Use only fresh oil, type Shell DIALA AX or equivalent. Take care not to damage delicate components
inside the tank if using a funnel for oil fill.
4. Replace the oil filler cap and tighten when finished. Wipe up any oil spills. Dispose of soiled absorber in
compliance with government requirements and ensure conformity to local disposal regulations.
Figure 6-1: Millenia HT tank oil fill
6.4.2 Indico 100 Oil Fill/Level Check
1. Loosen the oil fill plug screw on the Indico 100 tank lid.
2. With the screw sufficiently loosened, remove the rubber (neoprene) plug.
3. Use a clean ruler, strip of cardboard, or other equivalent material to determine the oil level --
measured always from the TOP surface of the HT tank’s lid.
• Normally the oil level should be between 0.5 -0.9 inches (13 - 23 mm) from the top of the tank lid.
• If the oil level is between 0.9 - 1.3 inches (23 - 33 mm) from the top of the tank lid, then clean oil
should be added as needed.
• If the oil level is greater than 1.3 inches (33 mm) below the top of the tank lid, please consult the
factory.
Figure 6-2: HT tank oil level
4. Use only fresh oil, type Shell DIALA AX or equivalent. If a funnel is used to add the oil, take care not to
damage any of the delicate components inside the tank.
5. Replace the oil fill plug. Once the plug is installed and the screw properly seated, tighten the screw 4
turns. This will secure the oil fill plug. Wipe up any oil spills. Dispose of soiled absorber in compliance
with government requirements and ensure conformity to local disposal regulations. THE OIL DOES
NOT CONTAIN PCBs
6.5.0 CLEANING
• Never use anything other than soap and water to clean plastic surfaces. Other cleaners may damage the
plastic.
• Never use any corrosive, solvent or abrasive detergents or polishes.
• Ensure that no water or other liquid can enter any equipment. This precaution prevents short circuits and
corrosion forming on components.
• Methods of disinfection used must conform to legal regulations and guidelines regarding disinfection and
explosion protection.
• If disinfectants are used which form explosive mixtures of gases, these gases must have dissipated before
switching on the equipment again.
• Disinfection by spraying is not recommended because the disinfectant may enter the X-ray equipment.
• If room disinfection is done with an atomizer, it is recommended that the equipment be switched OFF,
allowed to cool down and covered with a plastic sheet. When the disinfectant mist has subsided, the plastic
sheet may be removed and the equipment be disinfected by wiping.
6.6.0 EPROM REPLACEMENT
WARNING: PLEASE TAKE APPROPRIATE ELECTROSTATIC PRECAUTIONS AT ALL TIMES WHEN

HANDLING THE EPROM’s.
6.6.1 Console EPROM
1. With the generator mains power switched OFF, open the console to gain access to the console
EPROM. Refer to chapter 2, the section CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE, for the
procedure to access the console CPU board (23 X 56 cm consoles) or the console board (31 X 42 cm
consoles).
2. Locate and carefully remove the existing EPROM on the console board / console CPU board (refer to
figure 1E-4).
3. Carefully insert the replacement EPROM into the socket observing the orientation per figure 1E-4.
4. Re-assemble the console as per the procedure in chapter 2.
5. Refer to 6.6.4 before re-energizing the generator.
6.6.2 Power EPROM
1. With the generator mains power switched OFF, locate and carefully remove the existing power
EPROM on the generator CPU board (U38 or U41, refer to figure 1E-1).
NOTE THAT THE REPLACEMENT EPROM MAY HAVE FOUR LESS PINS THAN THE SOCKET IT
IS TO BE INSERTED INTO. IF THIS IS SO, THE EMPTY PINS MUST BE ON THE PIN 1 SIDE OF
THE EPROM AS SHOWN IN FIGURE 1E-1.
3. Refer to 6.6.4 before re-energizing the generator.
6.6.3 Dual Speed Starter EPROM (If fitted)
1. Switch the generator mains power OFF, AND WAIT 5 MINUTES FOR THE DC BUS CAPACITORS
TO FULLY DISCHARGE.
STEPS 2 AND 3 APPLY TO MILLENIA GENERATORS ONLY. IN INDICO 100 GENERATORS, THE DUAL
SPEED STARTER BOARD IS FULLY ACCESSIBLE WITH THE APPROPRIATE GENERATOR SIDE
PANEL(S) REMOVED.
2. Loosen the two nuts securing the clamping bracket at the top of the dual speed starter. Slide the
bracket up and gently remove the dual speed starter assembly. The cables connected to the dual
speed starter do not need to be removed in order to change the EPROM.
3. Carefully rotate the dual speed starter chassis to fully expose the dual speed starter board inside the
unit.
4. Locate and carefully remove the existing EPROM on the dual speed starter board (U26, refer to figure
1E-6).
6. Reinstall the dual speed starter assembly by reversing steps 2 and 3 (Millenia).
6.6.4 Resetting Factory Defaults
Should the part number (not revision) of the replacement EPROM be different from the EPROM being
replaced, then the FACTORY DEFAULT procedure(s) must be performed as detailed below. This will initialize
the CPU’s NVRAM as required by the new software and sets the data to it’s factory configured state. Note that
there are separate procedures for the console CPU board and for the generator CPU board.
CONSOLE CPU FACTORY DEFAULTS:
1. With the power OFF, set switch 8 of SW1 on the console CPU board to its ON position.
2. Power ON the generator. The console will prompt for a YES or NO to loading defaults for two
conditions (console settings and APR memory). Select YES to both.
3. Power OFF the console. Reset switch 8 of SW1 on the console CPU board to its OFF position.
This will initialize both the CONSOLE settings (refer to CONSOLE settings in chapter 3C) and the APR to the
factory default settings.
GENERATOR CPU FACTORY DEFAULTS:
1. With the power OFF, set switch 8 of SW1 on the generator CPU board to its OFF position.
2. Power ON the generator. After the initialization is complete, the console will display the message
FACTORY DEFAULTS.
3. Power OFF the generator. Reset switch 8 of SW1 on the generator CPU board to its ON position.
This will initialize all generator data to the factory defaults (tube selection, generator limits, receptor setup, I/O
configuration, AEC setup, AEC calibration, fluoro setup, tube calibration, time & date, error log and statistics).
6.7.0 BATTERY REPLACEMENT
To replace the battery on the console CPU board or on the generator CPU board, follow the procedure below.
Refer to the figure showing the location of these batteries in chapter 2, in the section “CHECKING THE RAM
BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE”. Refer to that section in chapter 2 for console disassembly instructions to gain
access to the console CPU board if required.
NOTE: THE CONSOLE BATTERY SHOULD BE REPLACED WITH THE GENERATOR POWERED UP.
THIS WILL PREVENT THE CONSOLE DATA FROM BEING LOST WHEN THE BATTERIES ARE
REMOVED.
THIS IS THE ONLY EXCEPTION TO THE RULE OF NOT SERVICING THE GENERATOR WHILE
THE POWER IS ON. FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THE HIGH VOLTAGE LOCATIONS AND
HAZARDS BEFORE REPLACING THIS BATTERY.
1. Remove the battery from the holder by gently prying under the battery at the access slot in the battery
holder using a small screwdriver. Slide the battery over the edge of the holder and remove it when it is
free.
2. Check the voltage of the new battery prior to inserting it. This should be nominally 3.0V, do not use if it
is under 2.80 V.
3. Wipe the replacement battery with a clean cloth, and ensure that the holder is clean and free of debris
before inserting the battery.
4. Gently lift the spring contact on the holder and insert the replacement battery positive (+) side up
6.8.0 TUBE CONDITIONING / SEASONING
Tube conditioning or “seasoning” is particularly important for new tubes or tubes that have not been used for
several days. This should be performed on each X-ray tube before attempting auto calibration, as an
unseasoned tube may not operate properly at higher kV values without arcing. Refer to the X-ray tube
manufacturer’s instructions, if available, for the tube conditioning or “seasoning” procedure. If the X-ray tube
manufacturers instructions are not available, the following procedure may be used:
6.8.1 Tube Conditioning (Overview)
The generator does X-ray tube auto calibration at 50 kV, 60 kV, 70 kV, 80 kV, 100 kV and 120 kV. The tube
normally needs to be seasoned before it can be operated at the higher voltages encountered during auto
calibration.
Tube seasoning is started by auto calibrating the kV stations up to and including part of the 70 kV
station. The tube is then seasoned at 70 kV. Progressively higher kV stations are then auto calibrated and
seasoned. Finally the entire kV and mA range is auto calibrated, then the tube is seasoned at the remaining
high kV values.
Manually releasing the exposure button during auto calibration of a particular kV station in the following
procedure prevents the generator from attempting operation beyond that kV/mA value.
NOTE: THE TUBE MANUFACTURER’S RECOMMENDED SEASONING PROCEDURE, IF AVAILABLE,

MUST ALWAYS BE USED IN PLACE OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE.
NOTE: LOW SPEED ONLY EXPOSURES ARE RECOMMENDED FOR THE SEASONING EXPOSURES, TO
PREVENT EXCESSIVE HEAT BUILD-UP IN THE HOUSING FROM THE STATOR WINDINGS OR
THE ROTOR BEARINGS.
X-ray tubes that have not been used for more than 8 hours may suffer thermal shock if operated at high
mA and kV without a warm-up procedure. A cold anode (Molybdenum) is very brittle and when
suddenly heated over a small area may experience thermal cracking of the anode surface, eventually
leading to permanent tube damage.
6.8.2 Tube Conditioning (Procedure)
The procedure below is intended for seasoning an X-ray tube prior to attempting tube auto calibration. To
season a tube that does not need to be calibrated, simply follow steps 2, 4, 6, 8, and 9.
1. Start the tube auto calibration sequence, and manually terminate the exposure at 70 kV and 250 mA.
2. Season the tube at 70 kV by taking approximately 10 exposures of 200 mA and 100 ms. These
exposures should be taken at the rate of approximately one every 15 seconds.
3. Restart the auto calibration sequence and manually terminate the exposure at 100 kV and 250 mA.
5. Restart the auto calibration sequence and manually terminate the exposure at 120 kV and 160 mA.
6.8.2 Tube Conditioning (Procedure) Cont
7. Restart the auto calibration sequence and allow the auto calibration sequence to complete.
9. Repeat step 8 at 140 kV, and then at 145 kV.
6.9.0 END OF PRODUCT LIFE
If the generator has completed its useful service life, local environmental regulations must be complied with in
regard to disposal of possible hazardous materials used in the construction of the generator.
In order to assist with this determination, the noteworthy materials used in the construction of this
generator are itemized below:
ITEM
• Electrical insulating oil in HT tank. This is a mineral oil with trace additives (60 Litre (17 U.S. gal) for
Millenia, 25 Litre (6.5 U.S. gal) for Indico 100).
• Solder (lead/tin).
• Epoxy fiberglass circuit board materials, tracks are solder on copper.
• Wire, tinned copper. Insulated with PVC, tefzel, or silicone.
• Steel and / or aluminum (generator cabinet and console chassis).
• Plastic (console enclosure and console membrane).
• Electrical and electronic components: IC’s, transistors, diodes, resistors, capacitors, etc.
CPI Canada Inc Theory of Operation 7
CHAPTER 7
THEORY OF OPERATION
CONTENTS:
7.0 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................................. 7-2

7.1 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.1.1 Control Console.......................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.1.2 High Voltage Power Supply........................................................................................................................ 7-3
7.1.3 Low Speed / Dual Speed Starter ................................................................................................................ 7-4
7.1.4 Generator Control Electronics .................................................................................................................... 7-5

7 Theory of Operation CPI Canada Inc
7.0 INTRODUCTION
The Indico 100 series X-ray generator consists of a high voltage power supply (including the HT oil tank
and low or dual speed starter), generator control electronics, and a control console.
Included in the power supply are:

• Power input circuits.
• One to three inverter modules.
• A resonant power circuit.
• A high voltage oil tank capable of driving one or two X-ray tubes.
• A rotor supply -- a standard low speed starter (LSS) or an optional dual speed starter (DSS).
• Power supply control circuits.
• One or two filament supplies.
• Auxiliary power circuits.
The HT oil tank consists of:

• High voltage transformers.
• Filament transformers.
• High voltage multiplier boards
• Tube selection relay (two tube tanks only).
The generator control electronics consist of:

• Generator interface board.
• Room interface board.
• Generator CPU board.
• Optional automatic exposure control (AEC) and digital interface assemblies.
Included in the control console are:

• An LCD fluorescent backlight display.
• An LED display/switch assembly.
• Console control and interface circuits.

7.1 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW
The following is a functional overview of the three main subassemblies that comprise the complete
generator.
• The console uses LED and LCD displays, to allow the operator to view the exposure parameters
selected. The radiographic display has a section for kV, mA, exposure time and a density display for
AEC applications.
• The LED and LCD displays on the console also provide information to the operator regarding
conditions of the generator and programming functions, along with any error messages. The console
also has several pushbuttons to select the different operating modes and features of the generator.
Among the available operating modes and features are: AEC; ABS (automatic brightness
stabilization); mA/ms (current/time); mAs (current-time product); film screen - fast, medium and detail;
focus/filament - large or small; six bucky/image receptors; AEC field - left, centre, right; X-ray
preparation; X-ray exposure and generator ON/OFF buttons.
• Inside the console there is a microprocessor that executes the main operating system program. This
includes an EPROM which contains the main program code, and a RAM chip which contains tables
for use with the main program, such as generator status and error messages. Tube limit data and
automatic programmed radiography (APR) exposure parameters are also stored in RAM. A battery
located inside the console supplies power to the RAM chip to ensure that the data is non-volatile, and
to keep the real time clock operational when the power is switched off.
• The LCD display receives its power from a high voltage DC to AC converter, and the console switches
interface with the microprocessor through ribbon cables.
• The communication between the console and the generator is achieved via a 15 pin shielded cable.
This cable provides a bi-directional serial link from the console to the generator control circuits.
Operational commands and status signals are sent, via this link, from the console microprocessor to
the generator CPU board.
7.1.2 High Voltage Power Supply
The power supply section of the generator contains three separate power supplies:
• The high voltage (kV) supply, which includes the inverter modules and the high voltage oil tank and
other circuits, delivers up to 150 kV and up to 1000 mA (depending on model) between the anode and
cathode of the X-ray tube.
• The filament supply board provides up to 6.5 amps to the selected filament in the X-ray tube. The X-
ray tube current is monitored by the generator control electronics and fed back to the filament supply.
The filament supply will make adjustments to the filament current in order to maintain a stable X-ray
tube current over the length of the X-ray exposure.
• The rotor supply (LSS or DSS) contains the circuits needed to drive the stator windings of either one
or two X-ray tubes.

7.1.2 High Voltage Power Supply (Cont)
The power supply includes the following major subassemblies:
• Integral to the high voltage power supply is the resonant circuit board. This assembly includes a
current transformer used to control and protect the inverter modules, an output common mode choke
for the inverters, and resonant inductors to optimize the inverter performance.
• The HT oil tank consists of high voltage transformers, filament transformers, high voltage rectifier
power boards, tube selection relay on two tube tanks, and feedback circuits for the output kV and mA.
The high voltage tank is capable of producing exposures of up to 80 kW and output voltages of up to
150 kV, depending on model.
• The power supply control board contains the feedback and control circuits for the high voltage tank as
well as the over-voltage and over-current detection, and arc protection circuits. It also contains a
voltage controlled oscillator for the gate pulse generator, which drives the FET’s of the inverter
module. This board connects to the control electronics through 37 pin and 15 pin D-connectors
providing the transmission of key control signals between the power supply and the control
electronics.
• The power supply control board contains the feedback and control circuits for the high voltage tank as
well as the over-voltage and over-current detection, and arc protection circuits. It also contains a
voltage controlled oscillator for the gate pulse generator, which drives the FET’s of the inverter
module. This board connects to the control electronics through 37 pin and 15 pin D-connectors
providing the transmission of key control signals between the power supply and the control
electronics.
• The power input board has the principle function of converting the mains power to a high voltage DC
bus, which in turn provides the energy to the inverter modules. This board also contains other high
voltage circuits, such as those for the soft start relays, the main contactor, and the EMI line filter
components. The power input board has the principle function of converting the mains power to a high
voltage DC buss, which in turn provides the energy to the inverter modules. This board also contains
other high voltage circuits, such as those for the soft start relays, the main contactor, and the EMI line
filter components.
7.1.3 Low Speed / Dual Speed Starter
• The low speed starter uses thyristor control to deliver nominally 240 VAC for a boost period of
approximately 1.2 seconds. This boost period is required to get the anode of the tube up to speed at
around 3200 rpm. At completion of the boost time, the stator voltage will be reduced to approximately
50 V for the run period, during which the correct tube speed is maintained for the length of the X-ray
exposure.
• The dual speed starter uses a microprocessor controlled IGBT inverter to provide programmable
boost and run voltages and programmable boost times to the stator windings of the X-ray tube. The
DSS supply can operate at low speed (50 or 60 Hz) or high speed (150 or 180 Hz) and also provides
DC braking. With microprocessor control, the DSS is able to maintain precise control of the rotor
supply functions, which enables stable and optimum performance of the tube at either low or high
speeds.

7.1.4 Generator Control Electronics
• The generator control electronics includes the microprocessor and control circuits that are essential to
ensure the precise control of the power supply that is needed for state-of-the-art X-ray generators.
Input and output (I/O) and auxiliary power circuits are also provided, to interface to the control console
and to peripheral equipment in the X-ray system.
• The generator’s executable code is stored in EPROM’s in the console and generator CPU boards.
Communication between the two CPU boards is provided through a serial link.
• The room interface board provides the terminal blocks, I/O and power circuits for interfacing the
generator to the peripheral x-ray room equipment. This board also provides the connection to the
generator safety interlock circuits. The output power and the I/O signal conditions can be programmed
on this board through a number of relays and jumper terminals.
• The generator CPU board processes the feedback signals, and provides digital to analog and analog
to digital conversion for the control signals. It provides reference voltages to and from the high voltage
power supply and also contains up to four serial communications channels (one channel is dedicated to
the console and can be configured as an RS232 or RS422 port, the second port is an RS232 port for the
remote fluoro control, and the last two are optional RS232 ports for other use) and two timers. The
programmable generator parameters are also stored on this board in battery backed-up RAM.
• The generator interface board interconnects most of the internal generator boards (AEC, CPU, rotor
supply and room interface). Using opto-isolators this board isolates the I/O signals from the peripheral
X-ray room equipment (connected to the room interface board), from the microprocessor and control
circuits. This board also contains the power and interface circuits to the operator console. The
generator interface board also provides the interconnection for other generator options, such as digital
imaging and automatic exposure control.
• The optional automatic exposure control (AEC) board has up to four channels for connecting to four
different image receptors with AEC capabilities. The board detects a voltage that corresponds to the
quantity of radiation received by the image receptor during an exposure. When the threshold level for
the desired exposure technique is received, the AEC board generates an exposure stop signal that
immediately terminates the exposure.


CPI Canada Inc Spares 8
CHAPTER 8
SPARES
CONTENTS:
Section Title
8.1.0 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2.0 SPARE PARTS LIST INDICO 100 GENERATOR................................................................................................. 8-2
8.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains the list of recommended spare parts for the various models of Indico 100 generators.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-07 Rev. K Page 8-1

8 Spares CPI Canada Inc
8.2.0 SPARE PARTS LIST INDICO 100 GENERATOR
DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER NOTE SUGGESTED QTY

Generator CPU board See note ⇒ 1b ⇐ See note
Generator interface board See note ⇒ 1c ⇐ See note
Room interface board 733184-00 2 1
Power supply control board 732816-03 1a 1
Filament board See note ⇒ 3 ⇐ See note
Auxiliary board 732221-02 4 1
Inverter board See note ⇒ 5 ⇐ See note
Power input board See note ⇒ 6a 1
Resonant Board See note ⇒ 7 1
AEC board See note ⇒ 8 1
Console CPU board See note ⇒ 1b ⇐ See note
Console display board See note ⇒ 9 1
Display assy, LCD See note ⇒ 21 1
Remote fluoro display board 729053-00 10 ⇐ See note
Remote fluoro control board 729038-00 10 ⇐ See note
Low speed starter board 732752-00 11 ⇐ See note
Digital I/O board See note ⇒ 18 ⇐ See note
Dual speed starter board 728877-03 12 ⇐ See note
Dual speed starter subassembly See note ⇒ 12 ⇐ See note
Hand switch assembly See note ⇒ 22 ⇐ See note
Battery, lithium 3.0V 7412290100 2 2
Capacitor, DC bus 470 uF 450 VDC 4150394100 13 6
Capacitor, DC bus 9000 uF 400 VDC 4155001400 14a 4
Contactor, line SC2715 2 1
Diode, mains rectifier 160MT120K 6623071100 13 1
Diode, mains rectifier DD89N12K, 6623507000 14a 1
DD90N12L, IRKD91-12
Fuse, A70QS10-14F 6739951800 12 7
Fuse, FNM-3 6711907400 2 5
Fuse, FNQ-10 6711905500 13 5
Fuse, GDC-1.6 5550033300 2 5
Fuse, GDC-2 5550032600 2 5
Fuse, GDC-2.5 5550034400 2 5
Fuse, GDC-5 5550035600 2 5
Fuse, MDA-5 6713000100 11 5
Fuse, MDA-7 6713000500 2 5
Fuse, MDA-10 6713000200 14a 5
Fuse, MDA-12 6713746500 2 5
Fuse, MDL-6/10 6713536000 6b 5
Fuse, MDL-1 1/2 6713541500 14b 5
Page 8-2 Rev. K Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-07

8.2.0 SPARE PARTS LIST INDICO 100 GENERATOR (Cont)
DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER NOTE SUGGESTED QTY

Fuse, MDL-4 6713544000 2 5
Fuse, NLN-100 6711906500 14a 5
Fuse, OTS-60 SC3434 13 5
Relay, DPST, 12V 7213011800 2 2
Connector, 4 pin 5618931800 12 1
Fan, axial 2084022900 20 1
Transformer, aux power supply 732417-00 2 1
Transformer, room I/F See note ⇒ 15 1
HT tank assembly (complete) See note ⇒ 16 ⇐ See note
NOTE:
1a. The part number shown is the suggested replacement for the original power supply control board. The
spares board is “full featured” and will replace the original board in your generator regardless of
configuration. This is intended to eliminate the need to stock multiple configurations of this board.
1b. Two versions of generator CPU boards and three versions of console CPU boards are used in Indico
100 generators. Please confirm the original part number(s) of these boards in your generator before
ordering spares. If your original generator CPU board is part number 732174-XX (where XX is a number
from 00 to 08), order part number 732174-06. This part number replaces all configurations of 732174.
The generator CPU board and the console CPU board must be matched per the table below:
APPLICATION GENERATOR CPU BOARD CONSOLE CPU BOARD

23 X 56 cm console If the original board is 732174-XX, <MUST USE WITH> 732218-00
order part number 732174-06 for
spares usage
23 X 56 cm console 734573-00 <MUST USE WITH> 733903-00
31 X 42 cm console 734573-00 <MUST USE WITH> 735852-00
1c. Two different generator interface boards are used in Indico 100 generators. For rad and R&F generators,
use part number 732177-06, for pulsed fluoro generators use part number 732177-08. Spares should be
stocked accordingly.
2. This part is common to all models of Indico 100 generators.
3. Three different filament boards are used in Indico 100 generators. RAD only generators use ONE
filament board, part number 731407-00. R&F generators use TWO filament boards, part number
731407-01 (large focus) and part number 731407-02 (small focus). Spares should be stocked
accordingly.
4. The part number shown is the suggested replacement for the original auxiliary board. The spares board
is “jumper configurable” in the field and as such will replace the original auxiliary board. This is intended
to eliminate the need to stock multiple configurations of this board.

NOTE (Cont):
5. Three different inverter board part numbers are used in Indico 100 generators. For 230 VAC 1 phase
and 480 VAC 3 phase generators use part number 732813-00, for 400 VAC 3 phase 30 / 50 / 80 kW
generators use part number 732813-04, for 230 VAC 1 phase 37.5 kW and for 400 VAC 3 phase 37.5 /
65 kW generators use part number 732813-05 (see note 17 for the definition of mains input voltage). 30
and 37.5 kW generators require one inverter board, 50 and 65 kW generators require two inverter
boards, and 80 kW generators require three inverter boards. Spares should be stocked accordingly.
6a. Two part numbers of power input boards are used for spares. For 1 phase 230 VAC generators use part
number 733798-01, for 3 phase 400 or 480 VAC generators use part number 732161-01.
6b. This fuse is used on all rad two tube generators, and on all R & F one tube and two tube generators.
Spares should be stocked accordingly.
7. Five different resonant boards are used in Indico 100 generators. Refer to the table below for the correct
part number for your generator.
O/P POWER (kW) & MAINS VOLTS RESONANT BOARD RESONANT BOARD
RAD POWER SUPPLIES R&F POWER SUPPLIES
30 kW (230 VAC 1φ, 400 / 480 VAC 3φ) 732808-00
37.5 / 40 kW (230 VAC 1φ, 400 VAC 3φ) 732808-05 732964-02
50 kW (400 VAC 3φ) 732808-01 732964-00
50 kW (480 VAC 3φ) 732808-02
65 kW (400 VAC 3φ) 732808-06 732964-03
80 kW (400 VAC 3φ) 732964-01
80 kW (400 / 480 VAC 3φ) 732808-03
8. The AEC board for your generator was selected to be compatible with specific AEC device(s). To
maintain full compatibility, the original part number must be ordered as a replacement. Refer to chapter
9, section 9.2.0 for the part number of the original AEC board shipped in the generator for which this
manual was prepared.
9. The console display board is supplied pre-mounted to the console front panel switch assembly. To
determine the required spares part number for this assembly, refer to the table below. CONSOLE
DISPLAY BOARD ONLY USED WITH THE 23 X 56 CM CONSOLE.
DESCRIPTION SWITCH/DISPLAY ASSY PART NO

SWITCH/DISPLAY ASSY, R&F, ENGLISH 734429-00
SWITCH/DISPLAY ASSY, R&F, GERMAN 734429-01
SWITCH/DISPLAY ASSY, RAD, ENGLISH 734430-00
SWITCH/DISPLAY ASSY, RAD, GERMAN 734430-01
10. Remote fluoro control is an option, spares should be stocked accordingly.
11. These items only used on generators fitted with low speed starter, spares should be stocked accordingly.

NOTE (Cont):
12. These items only used on dual speed starter option, spares should be stocked accordingly. Several part
numbers of dual speed starter (which are tube stator dependent) are used in Indico 100 generators. To
determine which dual speed starter assembly is in your generator, note the DUAL SPEED STARTER
ASSY part number on a label on the dual speed starter chassis. This will be the part number that must
be ordered for spares usage. For reference, this will be part number 733317-XX or 735925-XX where XX
is a two digit number designating the exact configuration.
The dual speed starter fuses listed are used on all four versions of dual speed starter.
13. These items are used on the 400/480 VAC 3 phase power input board. Spares should be stocked
accordingly.
14a. These items are used on 1 phase 230 VAC units only (on the DC bus assembly or on the 1 phase power
input board). Spares should be stocked accordingly.
14b. This fuse used on 1 phase 230 VAC rad two tube generators, and on 1 phase 230 VAC R & F one tube
and two tube generators. Spares should be stocked accordingly.
15. Two different room I/F transformers are used in Indico 100 generators. For 230 VAC 1 phase generators
use part number 733685-00, for 400 and 480 VAC 3 phase generators use part number 732179-00.
16. For replacement HT oil tank part numbers, consult factory.
17. NOTE REGARDING MAINS (LINE) VOLTAGE AS DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION: The mains voltage
referenced in this section is the mains voltage at the input to the generator (at the main fuses on the
power input board). This is not necessarily the same as the voltage at the main disconnect box in the
room, the reason being that an optional line adjusting transformer may be used with the generator which
steps the incoming line voltage to the generator up or down. To ensure that the correct part number is
selected for spares, it is suggested that the mains voltage be noted at the main input fuses INSIDE THE
GENERATOR.
18. The digital I/O board is optional, and used on generators intended to interface with digital imaging
systems. To ensure full compatibility, please order the same part number that is in your generator(s).
19. The hand switch assembly is optional, and is normally dealer installed.
20. A cooling fan is used on R&F power supplies only. Spares should be stocked accordingly.
21. For 23 X 56 cm consoles, use LCD display assembly part number 733396-00. For 31 X 42 cm consoles,
use LCD display assembly part number 735895-00.
22. For 23 X 56 cm consoles, use hand switch assembly part number 733176-00. For 31 X 42 cm consoles,
use hand switch assembly part number 735203-00.


CPI Canada Inc Schematics 9
CHAPTER 9
SCHEMATICS
CONTENTS:
9.1.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 9-2

9.2.0 FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATIC INDEX.............................................................................................................. 9-2
9.3.0 FUNCTIONAL DRAWINGS ........................................................................................................................... 9-2
Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-08 Rev. B Page 9-1

9 Schematics CPI Canada Inc
9.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains the functional schematics for your X-ray generator. Each schematic represents a
major function in the Indico 100 generator; the fourteen functional schematics in this chapter represent all
of the major functional blocks in Indico 100 generators.
9.2.0 FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATIC INDEX
The functional schematic index follows this page. The part number for the AEC board originally shipped in
your generator is listed at the bottom of this form.
9.3.0 FUNCTIONAL DRAWINGS
The functional schematics immediately follow the functional schematic index.
Page 9-2 Rev. B Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-08

CPI Canada Inc Schematics 9
REPLACE PAGE 9-3 WITH

“FUNCTIONAL DRAWING INDEX”
FORM MF-0718
THE ASSEMBLY PART NUMBER FOR THE AEC BOARD IS

TO BE TAKEN FROM THE AS-BUILT RECORD:
USE
“PWBA, DEDICATED AEC”

OR
“UNIVERSAL AEC, FINAL ASSY”
Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-08 Rev. B Page 9-3

9 Schematics CPI Canada Inc
Page 9-4 Rev. B Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-08

Quantum INDi XL Series Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Quantum INDi XL Series Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Quantum INDi XL Series Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CPI Canada Inc.

SERVICE INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION 2¾

P.N. #740855 ACCEPTANCE TEST 4¾

The original version of this manual (Aug.21,1997)

Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-00 Rev. A Page 0-1

(This page intentionally left blank)

Page 0-2 Rev. A Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-00

This Chapter contains the following sections.

Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-01 Rev. A Page 1-1

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Page 1-2 Rev. A Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-01

1A.2.0 GENERATOR DESCRIPTION

Major items provided are:

• X-ray generator housed in upper and lower cabinets

1A.3.0 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Figure 1A-1: Generator outline drawing (Millenia)

1A.3.0 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONT)

Figure 1A-2: Generator outline drawing (Indico 100)

• High frequency generator.

1A.6.0 ROTOR CONTROL

DUAL SPEED STARTER

LOW SPEED STARTER

1A.7.0 AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUTS

The above voltage sources are not compatible with:

1A.8.0 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION

1A.9.0 REGULATORIES AND DESIGN STANDARDS

1A.9.1 Environmental Specifications

TRANSPORT AND STORAGE

1A.9.2 Applicable Standards

1A.9.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

1A.10.0 TECHNIQUE FACTORS DEFINITIONS

• KV: KV peak after any initial kV overshoot.

Address any questions regarding X-ray generator operation to:

Mail: Customer Support Department

Telephone: (905) 877-0161

Fax: (905) 877-8320

(This page intentionally left blank)

1B.2.0 SAFETY AND WARNING SYMBOLS

High voltage symbol used to indicate the presence

Warning symbol used to indicate a potential hazard

Radiation exposure symbol used on operator

Fluoro radiation exposure symbol used on operator

1B.3.0 SAFETY NOTICES AND WARNINGS

THE MANUFACTURER ACCEPTS NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY GENERATOR NOT

THE MANUFACTURER ALSO ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR X-RAY RADIATION

SAFETY NOTICES AND WARNINGS (cont)

1B.4.0 SAFETY WARNING LABELS - INTRODUCTION

1B.4.1 Safety Warning Labels - Organization

The safety warning label information is organized into three subsections:

• Safety labels/notices common to Millenia and Indico 100

1B.5.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES COMMON TO MILLENIA AND INDICO 100

1B.5.1 Caution HV Behind Cover Label

1B.5.2 Weight Label

1B.5.3 DC Bus Label

1B.5.4 Console CPU Board / Console Board

1B.5.5 Generator Interface Board

1B.5.6 Room Interface Board

1B.5.7 AEC Board

1B.5.8 Power Input Board